Please be advised that this document is updated twice annually and may not reflect updates in the law made since the most recent revision date.
Last Updated: December 23, 2009 16:59:32
8-101
Terms, defined.For purposes of the Nebraska Banking Act, unless the context otherwise requires:
(1) Bank subsidiary corporation means a corporation which has a bank as a shareholder and which is organized for purposes of engaging in activities which are part of the business of banking or incidental to such business except for the receipt of deposits. A bank subsidiary corporation is not to be considered a branch of its bank shareholder;
(2) Capital or capital stock means capital stock;
(3) Department means the Department of Banking and Finance;
(4) Director means the Director of Banking and Finance;
(5) Bank or banking corporation means any incorporated banking institution which was incorporated under the laws of this state as they existed prior to May 9, 1933, and any corporation duly organized under the laws of this state for the purpose of conducting a bank within this state under the act. Bank means any such banking institution which is, in addition to the exercise of other powers, following the practice of repaying deposits upon check, draft, or order and of making loans;
(6) Order includes orders transmitted by electronic transmission;
(7) Automatic teller machine means a machine established and located off the premises of a financial institution which has a main chartered office or approved branch located in the State of Nebraska, whether attended or unattended, which utilizes electronic, sound, or mechanical signals or impulses, or any combination thereof, and from which electronic funds transfers may be initiated. An unattended automatic teller machine shall not be deemed to be a branch operated by a financial institution;
(8) Automatic teller machine surcharge means a fee that an operator of an automatic teller machine imposes upon a consumer for an electronic funds transfer, if such operator is not the financial institution that holds an account of such consumer from which the electronic funds transfer is to be made;
(9) Data processing center means a facility, wherever located, at which electronic impulses or other indicia of a transaction originating at an automatic teller machine or point-of-sale terminal are received and either authorized or routed to a switch or other data processing center in order to enable the automatic teller machine or point-of-sale terminal to perform any function for which it is designed;
(10) Point-of-sale terminal means an information processing terminal which utilizes electronic, sound, or mechanical signals or impulses, or any combination thereof, which are transmitted to a financial institution or which are recorded for later transmission to effectuate electronic funds transfer transactions for the purchase or payment of goods and services and which are initiated by an access device in conjunction with a personal identification number. A point-of-sale terminal is not a branch operated by a financial institution. Any terminal owned or operated by a seller of goods and services shall be connected directly or indirectly to an acquiring financial institution;
(11) Making loans includes advances or credits that are initiated by means of credit card or other transaction card. Transaction card and other transactions, including transactions made pursuant to prior agreements, may be brought about and transmitted by means of an electronic impulse. Such loan transactions including transactions made pursuant to prior agreements shall be subject to sections 8-815 to 8-829 and shall be deemed loans made at the place of business of the financial institution;
(12) Financial institution means a bank, savings bank, building and loan association, savings and loan association, or credit union, whether chartered by the United States, the department, or a foreign state agency; any other similar organization which is covered by federal deposit insurance; or a trust company;
(13) Financial institution employees includes parent holding company and affiliate employees;
(14) Switch means any facility where electronic impulses or other indicia of a transaction originating at an automatic teller machine or point-of-sale terminal are received and are routed and transmitted to a financial institution, data processing center, or other switch, wherever located. A switch may also be a data processing center;
(15) Impulse means an electronic, sound, or mechanical impulse, or any combination thereof;
(16) Insolvent means a condition in which (a) the actual cash market value of the assets of a bank is insufficient to pay its liabilities to its depositors, (b) a bank is unable to meet the demands of its creditors in the usual and customary manner, (c) a bank, after demand in writing by the director, fails to make good any deficiency in its reserves as required by law, or (d) the stockholders of a bank, after written demand by the director, fail to make good an impairment of its capital or surplus; and
(17) Foreign state agency means any duly constituted regulatory or supervisory agency which has authority over financial institutions and which is created under the laws of any other state, any territory of the United States, Puerto Rico, Guam, American Samoa, the Trust Territory of the Pacific Islands, or the Virgin Islands or which is operating under the code of law for the District of Columbia.
| Source | Laws 1963, c. 29, § 1, p. 134; Laws 1965, c. 27, § 1, p. 198; Laws 1967, c. 19, § 1, p. 117; Laws 1975, LB 269, § 1; Laws 1976, LB 561, § 1; Laws 1987, LB 615, § 1; Laws 1988, LB 375, § 1; Laws 1993, LB 81, § 1; Laws 1994, LB 611, § 1; Laws 1995, LB 384, § 1; Laws 1997, LB 137, § 1; Laws 1998, LB 1321, § 1; Laws 2000, LB 932, § 1; Laws 2002, LB 1089, § 1; Laws 2003, LB 131, § 1; Laws 2003, LB 217, § 1. |
When a corporation is conducting business as a bank, that corporation falls within the purview of Nebraska's banking statutes which regulate banks and banking in this state. In re Invol. Dissolution of Battle Creek State Bank, 254 Neb. 120, 575 N.W.2d. 356 (1998).Notwithstanding interest rate limits under Nebraska statutes, national bank in Nebraska can legally charge, on credit card transactions, same rates allowed by section 45-114 et seq. Fisher v. First Nat. Bank of Omaha, 548 F.2d 255 (8th Cir. 1977).
8-101.01
Act, how cited.Sections 8-101 to 8-1,140 shall be known and may be cited as
the Nebraska Banking Act.
| Source | Laws 1998, LB 1321, § 32; Laws 1999, LB 396, § 4; Laws 2009, LB327, § 1.August 30, 2009 |
8-102
Department of Banking and Finance; supervision and control of specified financial institutions; declaration of public purpose.The department shall, under the laws of this state specifically made applicable to each, have general supervision and control over banks, trust companies, credit unions, and building and loan associations; all of which are hereby declared to be quasi-public in nature and subject to regulation and control by the state.
| Source | Laws 1963, c. 29, § 2, p. 134; Laws 2002, LB 1094, § 1; Laws 2003, LB 131, § 2. |
Supervision and control extends to branches. First Fed. Sav. & Loan Assn. v. Department of Banking, 187 Neb. 562, 192 N.W.2d 736 (1971).
8-103
Director of Banking and Finance; financial institutions; supervision and examination; director and department employees; prohibited acts; exception; penalty.(1) The director shall have charge of and full supervision over the examination of banks and the enforcement of compliance with the statutes by banks and their holding companies in their business and functions and shall constructively aid and assist banks in maintaining proper banking standards and efficiency. The director shall also have charge of and full supervision over the examination of and the enforcement of compliance with the statutes by trust companies, building and loan associations, and credit unions in their business and functions and shall constructively aid and assist trust companies, building and loan associations, and credit unions in maintaining proper standards and efficiency.
(2) If the director is financially interested directly or indirectly in any financial institution doing business in Nebraska, subject to his or her jurisdiction, the financial institution shall be under the direct supervision of the Governor, and as to such financial institution, the Governor shall exercise all the supervisory powers otherwise vested in the Director of Banking and Finance by the laws of this state, and reports of examination by state bank examiners, foreign state bank examiners, examiners of the Federal Reserve Board, examiners of the Office of the Comptroller of the Currency, and examiners for the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation shall be transmitted to the Governor.
(3)(a) No person employed by the department shall be permitted to borrow money from any financial institution doing business in Nebraska subject to the jurisdiction of the department, except that persons employed by the department may borrow money in the normal course of business from the Nebraska State Employees Credit Union.
(b) In the event a loan to a person employed by the department is sold or otherwise transferred to a financial institution doing business in Nebraska and subject to the jurisdiction of the department, no violation of this section occurs if (i) the person employed by the department did not solicit the sale or transfer of the loan and (ii) the person employed by the department gives notice to the director of such sale or transfer. The director, in his or her discretion, may require such person to make all reasonable efforts to seek another lender.
(4) Any person who intentionally violates this section or who aids, abets, or assists in a violation of this section shall be guilty of a Class IV felony.
| Source | Laws 1933, c. 18, § 2, p. 135; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-1,123; R.S.1943, § 8-102; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 3, p. 135; Laws 1967, c. 20, § 1, p. 122; Laws 1985, LB 653, § 1; Laws 1988, LB 375, § 2; Laws 1996, LB 1053, § 1; Laws 2002, LB 1094, § 2; Laws 2003, LB 131, § 3. |
8-103.01
Repealed. Laws 2002, LB 1094, § 19.
8-104
Director of Banking and Finance; oath; bond or insurance.The director shall, before assuming the duties of office, take and subscribe to the constitutional oath of office, and file the same in the office of the Secretary of State, and shall be bonded or insured as required by section 11-201.
| Source | Laws 1933, c. 18, § 1, p. 134; Laws 1935, c. 12, § 1, p. 81; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-1,122; R.S.1943, § 8-101; Laws 1947, c. 16, § 2, p. 96; Laws 1947, c. 11, § 1, p. 75; Laws 1951, c. 303, § 1, p. 994; Laws 1957, c. 367, § 2, p. 1289; Laws 1959, c. 425, § 1, p. 1427; Laws 1961, c. 14, § 1, p. 106; R.R.S.1943, § 8-101; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 4, p. 135; Laws 1967, c. 20, § 2, p. 122; Laws 1978, LB 653, § 4; Laws 2004, LB 884, § 3. |
Cross Reference
For provisions of premium on bond of receiver, see section 25-21,218.
For provisions relating to appointment of Director of Banking and Finance, see section 81-102.
Department of Banking is a legal entity, and as receiver and liquidating agent of bank, had authority, by proceeding in court, to prosecute action to collect stockholders' liability. Department of Banking v. Foe, 136 Neb. 422, 286 N.W. 264 (1939).Under this section, the Department of Banking is a legal entity and has authority to sue. In re Estate of Hall, 136 Neb. 417, 286 N.W. 262 (1939); Department of Banking v. Hedges, 136 Neb. 382, 286 N.W. 277 (1939).Under 1929 act, Department of Banking was ineligible to be appointed a judicial receiver because it was not a qualified legal entity. State ex rel. Sorensen v. Hoskins State Bank, 132 Neb. 878, 273 N.W. 834 (1937).
8-105
Deputies; examiners and assistants; disqualifications; salaries; bond or insurance.(1) The director may employ such deputies, examiners, and other assistants as he or she may need to discharge in a proper manner the duties imposed upon him or her by law. Neither the director, nor any deputy or assistant, shall employ any person who at the time of hire is a relative of the director or a relative of any deputy or assistant in the work of the department. The deputies, examiners, and other assistants shall perform such duties as shall be assigned to them. The deputies and financial institution examiners hired after March 4, 2003, shall hold office at the will of the director and shall receive such salary as set by the director and approved by the Governor based upon the level of credentials for the positions. Each employee who is employed as a deputy or a financial institution examiner on March 4, 2003, may elect to become employed at will. The election to become employed at will may be made at any time upon notification to the director in writing, but once made, such election shall be final. Until the election to be employed at will is made, the employee shall be treated as continuing participation in the State Personnel System. The director shall, with the approval of the Governor, fix the compensation of the other examiners and assistants, which shall be paid either monthly or on a biweekly basis.
(2) The deputies, examiners, and other assistants, before assuming the duties of office, shall be bonded or insured as required by section 11-201.
| Source | Laws 1933, c. 18, § 3, p. 135; Laws 1933, c. 19, § 3, p. 186; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-1,124; Laws 1943, c. 13, § 1, p. 77; R.S.1943, § 8-103; Laws 1945, c. 238, § 19, p. 712; Laws 1947, c. 16, § 3, p. 97; Laws 1951, c. 311, § 1, p. 1065; Laws 1955, c. 9, § 1, p. 74; R.R.S.1943, § 8-103; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 5, p. 135; Laws 1973, LB 164, § 1; Laws 1978, LB 653, § 5; Laws 1996, LB 1053, § 2; Laws 2003, LB 85, § 1; Laws 2004, LB 884, § 4. |
8-106
Director of Banking and Finance; rules and regulations; power to make; standards.The director shall have the power to make such rules and to establish such regulations for the government of banks under his supervision as may in his judgment seem wise and expedient and which do not in any way conflict with any of the provisions of law. In making such rules and regulations, the director shall consider generally recognized sound banking principles, the financial soundness of banks, competitive conditions, and general economic conditions.
| Source | Laws 1923, c. 191, § 34, p. 457; C.S.1929, § 8-104; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 7, p. 137; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-104; R.S.1943, § 8-107; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 6, p. 136. |
Cross Reference
For adoption and promulgation of administrative rules, see sections 84-901 to 84-920.
8-107
Banks; books and accounts; failure to keep; penalty.The department shall have power to require the officers of any bank, or any of them, to open and keep such books or accounts as the department in its discretion may determine and prescribe for the purpose of keeping accurate and convenient records of the transactions and accounts of such bank. Any bank that refuses or neglects to open and keep such books or accounts as may be prescribed by the department shall be subject to a penalty of ten dollars for each day it neglects or fails to open and keep such books and accounts after receiving written notice from the department. Such penalty may be collected in the manner prescribed for the collection of fees for the examination of such bank.
| Source | Laws 1923, c. 191, § 33, p. 456; C.S.1929, § 8-102; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 5, p. 136; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-102; R.S.1943, § 8-105; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 7, p. 136. |
Bank officer must enter up transaction at once. State ex rel. Sorensen v. Citizens State Bank of Wahoo, 124 Neb. 846, 248 N.W. 388 (1933).
8-108
Director of Banking and Finance; financial institution examination; powers; procedure; charge.The director, his or her deputy, or any duly appointed examiner shall have power to make a thorough examination into all the books, papers, and affairs of any bank or other institution in Nebraska subject to the department's jurisdiction, or its holding company, if any, and in so doing to administer oaths and affirmations, to examine on oath or affirmation the officers, agents, and clerks of such institution or its holding company, if any, touching the matter which they may be authorized and directed to inquire into and examine, and to subpoena the attendance of any person or persons in this state to testify under oath or affirmation in relation to the affairs of such institution or its holding company, if any. Such powers shall include, but not be limited to, the authority to examine and monitor by electronic means the books, papers, and affairs of any financial institution or the holding company of a financial institution. The examination may be in the presence of at least two members of the board of directors of the institution or its holding company, if any, undergoing such examination, and it shall be the duty of the examiner to incorporate in his or her report the names of the directors in whose presence the examination was made. The director may accept any examination or report from the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, the Federal Reserve Board, the Comptroller of the Currency, or a foreign state agency. The director may provide any such examination or report to the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, the Federal Reserve Board, the Comptroller of the Currency, or a foreign state agency. The department shall have power to examine the books, papers, and affairs of any electronic data processing center which has contracted with a financial institution to conduct the financial institution's electronic data processing business. The department may charge the electronic data processing center for the time spent by examiners in such examination at the rate set forth in section 8-606 for examiners' time spent in examinations of financial institutions.
| Source | Laws 1909, c. 10, § 8, p. 69; R.S.1913, § 287; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVI, § 6, p. 687; C.S.1922, § 7987; Laws 1923, c. 191, § 8, p. 441; C.S.1929, § 8-118; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 13, p. 142; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-118; R.S.1943, § 8-115; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 8, p. 137; Laws 1985, LB 653, § 2; Laws 1988, LB 375, § 3; Laws 1992, LB 757, § 2; Laws 2007, LB124, § 1. |
8-109
Bank examiner; failure to report unlawful conduct or unsafe condition; penalty.If any bank examiner shall have knowledge of the insolvency or unsafe condition of any bank under state supervision, or that there are bad or doubtful assets in such bank, or that the bank or any of its officers has violated any law governing the conduct of the bank, or that it is unsafe and inexpedient to permit such bank to continue business, and shall fail to forthwith report such fact in writing over his signature to the department, he shall be guilty of a Class II misdemeanor and shall forfeit his office.
| Source | Laws 1923, c. 191, § 36, p. 457; Laws 1925, c. 30, § 8, p. 127; C.S.1929, § 8-110; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 9, p. 139; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-110; R.S.1943, § 8-108; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 9, p. 137; Laws 1977, LB 40, § 37. |
8-110
Banks; bonds; filing; approval; requirements; open to inspection.The department shall require each state bank to obtain a fidelity bond, naming the bank as obligee, in an amount to be fixed by the department. The bond shall be issued by an authorized insurer and shall be conditioned to protect and indemnify the bank from loss which it may sustain, of money or other personal property, including that for which the bank is responsible through or by reason of the fraud, dishonesty, forgery, theft, embezzlement, wrongful abstraction, misapplication, misappropriation, or any other dishonest or criminal act of or by any of its officers or employees. Such bond may contain a deductible clause in an amount to be approved by the director. An executed copy of the bond shall be filed with and approved by the director and shall remain a part of the records of the department. If the premium of the bond is not paid, the bond shall not be canceled or subject to cancellation unless at least ten days' advance notice, in writing, is filed with the department. No bond which is current with respect to premium payments shall be canceled or subject to cancellation unless at least forty-five days' advance notice, in writing, is filed with the department. The bond shall always be open to public inspection during the office hours of the department. In the event a bond is canceled, the department may take whatever action it deems appropriate in connection with the continued operation of the bank involved.
| Source | C.S.1929, § 8-103; Laws 1930, Spec. Sess., c. 6, § 13, p. 32; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 6, p. 137; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-103; R.S.1943, § 8-106; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 10, p. 138; Laws 1973, LB 164, § 2; Laws 1979, LB 220, § 1; Laws 1985, LB 653, § 3. |
Each executive officer of a state bank is required by this section to give a surety bond to protect it from pecuniary loss sustained by it through forbidden acts committed directly by him or by connivance with others. Luikart v. Flannigan, 130 Neb. 901, 267 N.W. 165 (1936).
8-111
Director of Banking and Finance; real estate; power to convey; execution of conveyance.The director may convey any real estate title to which is vested in the Department of Banking and Finance by operation of law or otherwise. Such conveyance shall be signed by the director, sealed with the seal of the department, and acknowledged by the director.
| Source | Laws 1925, c. 30, § 7, p. 127; Laws 1929, c. 38, § 20, p. 167; C.S.1929, § 8-112; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 10, p. 140; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-112; R.S.1943, § 8-109; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 11, p. 138. |
8-112
Director of Banking
and Finance; records required; list of borrowers; disclosures prohibited;
confidential records.(1) The director shall keep,
as records of his or her office, proper books showing all acts, matters, and
things done under the jurisdiction of the department. Neither the director
nor anyone connected with the department shall in any instance disclose the
name of any depositor or debtor of any financial institution or other entity
regulated by the department or the amount of his or her deposit or debt to
anyone, except insofar as may be necessary in the performance of his or her
official duty, except that the department may maintain a record of borrowers
from the financial institutions in this state and may give information concerning
the total liabilities of any such borrowers to any financial institution owning
obligations of such borrowers.
(2) Examination reports, investigation reports, and documents
and information relating to such reports are confidential records of the department
and may be released or disclosed only (a) insofar as is necessary in the performance
of the official duty of the department or (b) pursuant to a properly issued
subpoena to the department and
upon entry of a protective order from a court of competent jurisdiction to
protect and keep confidential the names of borrowers or depositors or to protect
the public interest.
(3) Examination reports, investigation
reports, and documents and information relating to such reports remain confidential
records of the department, even if such examination reports, investigation
reports, and documents and information relating to such reports are transmitted
to a financial institution or other entity regulated by the department which
is the subject of such reports or documents and information, and may not be
otherwise released or disclosed by any such financial institution or other
entity regulated by the department.
(4) The restrictions listed in subsections
(2) and (3) of this section shall also apply to any representative or agent
of the financial institution or other entity regulated by the department.
(5) If examination reports,
investigation reports, or documents and information relating to such reports
are subpoenaed from the department, the party issuing the subpoena shall give
notice of the issuance of such subpoena at least three business days in advance
of the entry of a protective order to the financial institution or other entity regulated by the department which
is the subject of such reports or documents and information, unless the financial
institution or other entity
regulated by the department is already a party to the underlying
proceeding or unless such notice is otherwise prohibited by law or by court
order.
| Source | Laws 1923, c. 191, § 35, p. 457; Laws 1929, c. 38, § 18, p. 166; C.S.1929, § 8-119; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 14, p. 142; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-119; R.S.1943, § 8-116; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 12, p. 138; Laws 1987, LB 2, § 1; Laws 1996, LB 1053, § 3; Laws 1997, LB 137, § 2; Laws 1999, LB 396, § 6; Laws 2009, LB327, § 3.August 30, 2009 |
8-113
Unauthorized use of word bank or its
derivatives; penalty.(1) No
individual, firm, company, corporation, or association doing business in the
State of Nebraska, unless organized as a bank under the Nebraska Banking Act
or the authority of the federal government, or as a building and loan association,
savings and loan association, or savings bank under Chapter 8, article 3,
or the authority of the federal government, shall use the word bank or any
derivative thereof as any part of a title or description of any business activity.
(2) This section does not
apply to: (a) Banks, building and loan
associations, savings and loan associations, or savings banks chartered and
supervised by a foreign state agency; (b) bank holding companies
registered pursuant to section 8-913 if the term holding company is also used
as any part of the title or description of any business activity or if the
derivative banc is used; (c) affiliates or subsidiaries
of (i) a bank organized under
the Nebraska Banking Act or the authority of the federal government or chartered
and supervised by a foreign state agency, (ii) a building and loan association,
savings and loan association, or savings bank organized under Chapter 8, article
3, or the authority of the federal government or chartered and supervised
by a foreign state agency, or (iii) a bank holding company
registered pursuant to section 8-913 if the term holding company is also used
as any part of the title or description of any business activity or if the
derivative banc is used; (d) organizations substantially
owned by (i) a bank organized under
the Nebraska Banking Act or the authority of the federal government or chartered
and supervised by a foreign state agency, (ii) a building and loan association,
savings and loan association, or savings bank organized under Chapter 8, article
3, or the authority of the federal government or chartered and supervised
by a foreign state agency, (iii) a bank holding company
registered pursuant to section 8-913 if the term holding company is also used
as any part of the title or description of any business activity or if the
derivative banc is used, or (iv) any combination of entities
listed in subdivisions (i) through (iii) of
this subdivision; (e) mortgage bankers licensed
or registered under the Residential
Mortgage Licensing Act, if the word mortgage immediately
precedes the word bank or its derivative; (f) organizations described
in section 501(c)(3) of the Internal Revenue Code as defined in section 49-801.01
and exempt from taxation under section 501(a) of the code; (g) trade
associations which are exempt from taxation under section 501(c)(6) of the
code which represent a segment of the banking or savings and loan industries,
and any affiliate or subsidiary thereof; (h)
firms, companies, corporations, or associations which sponsor incentive-based
solid waste recycling programs which issue reward points or credits to persons
for their participation therein; and (i) such
other firms, companies, corporations, or associations as have been in existence
and doing business prior to December 1, 1975, under a name composed in part
of the word bank or some derivative thereof.
(3) Any violation of this
section shall be a Class V misdemeanor.
| Source | Laws 1921, c. 297, § 1, p. 949; Laws 1921, c. 313, § 1, p. 1000; C.S.1922, § 7985; Laws 1929, c. 37, § 1, p. 155; C.S.1929, § 8-116; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 12, p. 141; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-116; R.S.1943, § 8-113; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 13, p. 139; Laws 1977, LB 40, § 38; Laws 1987, LB 2, § 2; Laws 1998, LB 1321, § 2; Laws 2004, LB 999, § 1; Laws 2005, LB 533, § 1; Laws 2007, LB124, § 2; Laws 2009, LB32, § 1;Laws 2009, LB328, § 1.The Revisor of Statutes has pursuant to section 49-769 correlated LB32, section 1, with LB328, section 1, to reflect all amendments.Changes made by LB32 became effective March 6, 2009. Changes made by LB328 became effective April 23, 2009. |
Cross Reference
Residential Mortgage Licensing Act, see section 45-701.
8-114
Banks; corporate status required; unlawful banking; penalty.It shall be unlawful for any person to conduct a bank within this state except by means of a corporation duly organized for such purpose under the laws of this state. It shall be unlawful for any corporation to receive money upon deposit or conduct a bank under the laws of this state until such corporation has complied with all the provisions and requirements of the Nebraska Banking Act. Any violation of this section shall be a Class V misdemeanor for each day of the continuation of such offense and be cause for the appointment of a receiver as provided in the act to wind up such banking business.
| Source | Laws 1909, c. 10, § 2, p. 66; R.S.1913, § 281; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVI, § 3, p. 686; C.S.1922, § 7984; C.S.1929, § 8-115; R.S.1943, § 8-111; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 14, p. 139; Laws 1977, LB 40, § 39; Laws 1987, LB 2, § 3; Laws 1998, LB 1321, § 3. |
Where a federal savings and loan association installs a computer in a store to facilitate electronic transfer of funds between the association and its depositors, the store operator, by manning the computer, is not engaging in a banking or savings and loan business. State ex rel. Meyer v. American Community Stores Corp., 193 Neb. 634, 228 N.W.2d 299 (1975).It is unlawful to conduct a bank except by means of a corporation. First Nat. Bank & Trust Co. v. Ley, 182 Neb. 164, 153 N.W.2d 743 (1967).
8-115
Banks; charter required.No corporation shall conduct a bank in this state without having first obtained a charter in the manner provided in the Nebraska Banking Act.
| Source | Laws 1909, c. 10, § 11, p. 71; R.S.1913, § 290; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVI, § 9, p. 689; C.S.1922, § 7990; C.S.1929, § 8-120; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 15, p. 143; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-120; R.S.1943, § 8-117; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 15, p. 140; Laws 1987, LB 2, § 4; Laws 1998, LB 1321, § 4. |
When application is made for charter, it is the duty of state officials to investigate and determine integrity and responsibility of applicants for charter. Shumway v. Warrick, 108 Neb. 652, 189 N.W. 301 (1922).State Banking Board did not abuse discretion in refusing charter where evidence of unfitness and unfavorable financial ability was presented. In re Commercial State Bank, 105 Neb. 248, 179 N.W. 1021 (1920).Refusal to grant charter is not justified where required capital paid in and proposed stockholders show requisite qualifications. State ex rel. Woolridge v. Morehead, 100 Neb. 864, 161 N.W. 569 (1917), L.R.A. 1917D 310 (1917).Discretionary power given to state officials to refuse charter to savings bank to be conducted in same room and with same directors as national bank. State ex rel. Chamberlin v. Morehead, 99 Neb. 146, 155 N.W. 879 (1915).Even though issued a charter under state law, state bank which becomes a member of Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation thereby becomes an instrumentality of United States, and federal statute forbidding embezzlement of funds of member bank applies to officer of such bank. United States v. Doherty, 18 F.Supp. 793 (D. Neb. 1937), affirmed 94 F.2d 495 (8th Cir. 1938).
8-115.01
Banks; new charter; transfer of charter; procedure.When an application required by section 8-120 is made by a corporation, the following procedures shall be followed:
(1) Except as provided for in subdivision (2) of this section, when application is made for a new bank charter, a public hearing shall be held on each application. Notice of the filing of the application shall be published by the department for three weeks in a legal newspaper published in or of general circulation in the county where the applicant proposes to operate the bank. The date for hearing the application shall be not less than thirty days after the last publication of notice of hearing and not more than ninety days after the application has been accepted for filing by the director as substantially complete unless the applicant agrees to a later date. Notice of the filing of the application shall be sent by the department to all financial institutions located in the county where the applicant proposes to operate;
(2) When application is made for a new bank charter and the director determines, in his or her discretion, that the conditions of subdivision (3) of this section are met, then the public hearing requirement of subdivision (1) of this section shall only be required if, (a) after publishing a notice of the proposed application in a newspaper of general circulation in the county where the main office of the applicant is to be located and (b) after giving notice to all financial institutions located within such county, the director receives a substantive objection to the application within fifteen days after the first day of publication;
(3) The director shall consider the following in each application before the public hearing requirement of subdivision (1) of this section may be waived:
(a) Whether the experience, character, and general fitness of the applicant and of the applicant's officers and directors is such as to warrant belief that the applicant will operate the business honestly, fairly, and efficiently;
(b) Whether the length of time that the applicant or a majority of the applicant's officers, directors, and shareholders have been involved in the business of banking in this state has been for a minimum of five consecutive years; and
(c) Whether the condition of financial institutions currently owned by the applicant, the applicant's holding company, if any, or the applicant's officers, directors, or shareholders is such as to indicate that a hearing on the current application would not be necessary;
(4) Except as provided in subdivision (6) of this section, when application is made for transfer of a bank charter and move of the main office of a bank to any location other than within the corporate limits of the city or village of its original charter or, if such bank charter is not located in a city or village, then for transfer outside the county in which it is located, the director shall hold a hearing on the matter if he or she determines, in his or her discretion, that the condition of the applicant warrants a hearing. If the director determines that the condition of the applicant does not warrant a hearing, the director shall (a) publish a notice of the filing of the application in a newspaper of general circulation in the county where the proposed main office and charter of the applicant would be located and (b) give notice of such application to all financial institutions located within the county where the proposed main office and charter would be located and to such other interested parties as the director may determine. If the director receives any substantive objection to the proposed relocation within fifteen days after the first day of publication, he or she shall hold a hearing on the application. Notice of a hearing held pursuant to this subdivision shall be published for two consecutive weeks in a newspaper of general circulation in the county where the main office would be located. The date for hearing the application shall be not less than thirty days after the last publication of notice of hearing and not more than ninety days after the application has been accepted for filing by the director as substantially complete unless the applicant agrees to a later date. When the persons making application for transfer of a main office and charter are officers or directors of the bank, there is a rebuttable presumption that such persons are parties of integrity and responsibility;
(5) Except as provided in subdivision (6) of this section, when application is made for a move of any bank's main office within the city, village, or county, if not chartered within a city or village, of its original charter, the director shall publish notice of the proposed move in a newspaper of general circulation in the county where the main office of the applicant is located and shall give notice of such intended move to all financial institutions located within the county where such bank is located. If the director receives a substantive objection to such move within fifteen days after publishing such notice, he or she shall publish an additional notice and hold a hearing as provided in subdivision (1) of this section;
(6) With the approval of the director, a bank may move its main office and charter to the location of a branch of the bank without public notice or hearing as long as (a) the condition of the bank, in the discretion of the director, does not warrant a hearing and (b) the branch (i) is located in Nebraska, (ii) has been in operation for at least one year as a branch of the bank or was acquired by the bank pursuant to section 8-1506 or 8-1516, and (iii) is simultaneously relocated to the original main office location;
(7) The director shall send any notice to financial institutions required by this section by first-class mail, postage prepaid, or electronic mail. Electronic mail may be used if the financial institution agrees in advance to receive such notices by electronic mail;
(8) The expense of any publication and mailing required by this section shall be paid by the applicant; and
(9) Notwithstanding any provision of this section, the director shall take immediate action on any charter application or applications concerned without the benefit of a hearing in the case of an emergency so declared by the Governor, the Secretary of State, and the director.
| Source | Laws 1965, c. 25, § 1, p. 191; Laws 1967, c. 19, § 2, p. 117; Laws 1973, LB 164, § 3; Laws 1974, LB 721, § 1; Laws 1979, LB 220, § 2; Laws 2002, LB 957, § 1; Laws 2003, LB 217, § 2; Laws 2005, LB 533, § 2; Laws 2008, LB851, § 1. March 20, 2008 |
8-116
Banks; capital stock; amount required.(1) A charter for a bank hereafter organized shall not be issued unless the corporation applying therefor shall have a surplus of not less than seventy thousand dollars or seventy percent of its paid-up capital stock, whichever is greater, and a paid-up capital stock as follows: In villages or counties of less than one thousand inhabitants, one hundred thousand dollars; in cities, villages, or counties of one thousand or more and less than twenty-five thousand inhabitants, not less than one hundred fifty thousand dollars; in cities or counties of twenty-five thousand or more and less than one hundred thousand inhabitants, not less than two hundred thousand dollars; and in cities or counties of one hundred thousand or more inhabitants, not less than five hundred thousand dollars.
(2) Notwithstanding subsection (1) of this section, the department shall have the authority to determine the minimum amount of paid-up capital stock and surplus required for any corporation applying for a bank charter, which amounts shall not be less than the amounts provided in subsection (1) of this section.
(3) For purposes of this section, population shall be determined by the most recent federal decennial census.
| Source | Laws 1909, c. 10, § 13, p. 72; R.S.1913, § 292; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVI, § 11, p. 689; Laws 1921, c. 297, § 3, p. 950; C.S.1922, § 7992; Laws 1923, c. 192, § 1, p. 463; C.S.1929, § 8-122; Laws 1935, c. 19, § 1, p. 95; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-122; Laws 1943, c. 19, § 3(1), p. 102; R.S.1943, § 8-119; Laws 1959, c. 15, § 3, p. 132; Laws 1961, c. 15, § 1, p. 111; R.R.S.1943, § 8-119; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 16, p. 140; Laws 1967, c. 19, § 3, p. 118; Laws 1973, LB 164, § 4; Laws 1979, LB 220, § 3; Laws 1983, LB 252, § 2; Laws 2002, LB 1094, § 3; Laws 2008, LB851, § 2.July 18, 2008 |
8-116.01
Banks; capital notes and debentures; issuance; conditions.With the approval of the director, any bank may at any time, through action of its board of directors and without requiring any action of its stockholders, issue and sell its capital notes or debentures. Such capital notes or debentures shall be subordinate and subject to the claims of depositors and may be subordinated and subjected to the claims of other creditors. The capital stock of any bank as such term capital stock is used respectively in sections 8-116, 8-118, and 8-127, the capital of any corporation transacting a banking business as the term capital is used in section 8-187, and the capital of a bank as the term capital is used in section 8-132, shall be deemed to be unimpaired when the amount of such capital notes and debentures as represented by cash or sound assets exceeds the impairment as found by the department. Before any such capital notes or debentures are retired or paid by the bank, any existing deficiency of its capital, disregarding the notes or debentures to be retired, must be paid in, in cash, to the end that the sound capital assets shall at least equal the capital or capital stock of the bank in the sense such terms capital and capital stock are used in the respective sections named. Such capital notes or debentures shall in no case be subject to any assessment. The holders of such capital notes or debentures shall not be held individually responsible as such holders for any debts, contracts, or engagements of such bank and shall not be held liable for assessments to restore impairments in the capital of such bank.
| Source | Laws 1935, c. 8, § 11, p. 76; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-411; R.S.1943, § 8-710; Laws 1961, c. 14, § 9, p. 109; R.R.S.1943, § 8-710; Laws 1973, LB 164, § 5; Laws 2003, LB 217, § 3; Laws 2005, LB 533, § 3. |
8-117
Repealed. Laws 2002, LB 1094,§19.
8-117.01
Repealed. Laws 2002, LB 1094,§19.
8-118
Banks; unlawful promotion; sale of stock prior to issuance of charter; penalty.It shall be unlawful for any person for hire (1) to promote or attempt to promote the organization of a corporation to conduct the business of a bank in this state or (2) to sell the capital stock of such a corporation prior to the issuance of a charter to such corporation authorizing its operation as a bank. Any person violating the provisions of this section shall be guilty of a Class II misdemeanor.
| Source | Laws 1909, c. 10, § 13, p. 72; R.S.1913, § 292; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVI, § 11, p. 689; Laws 1921, c. 297, § 3, p. 950; C.S.1922, § 7992; Laws 1923, c. 192, § 1, p. 463; C.S.1929, § 8-122; Laws 1935, c. 19, § 1, p. 96; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-122; Laws 1943, c. 19, § 3(4), p. 103; R.S.1943, § 8-122; Laws 1959, c. 15, § 6, p. 134; R.R.S.1943, § 8-122; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 18, p. 141; Laws 1967, c. 19, § 5, p. 119; Laws 1973, LB 164, § 6; Laws 1977, LB 40, § 40. |
8-119
Capital stock; sale; compensation prohibited; false statement; penalties.No corporation organized for the purpose of conducting a bank under the laws of this state shall be granted the certificate provided in section 8-121, or the charter provided in section 8-122, until there shall have been filed with the department a statement, under oath, of the president or cashier of such corporation that no premium, bonus, commission, compensation, reward, salary, or other form of remuneration has been paid, or promised to be paid, to any person for selling the stock of such corporation. The president or cashier of any such corporation who shall be found guilty of filing a false statement under the provisions of this section shall be guilty of a Class I misdemeanor. Whenever, after such certificate and charter shall have been delivered, the department shall determine, after a public hearing that such statement is false, it shall cancel such certificate and charter, and a receiver shall be appointed for such corporation in the manner provided for in case of a corporation which is conducting a bank in an unsafe or unauthorized manner.
| Source | Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVI, § 54, p. 708; C.S.1922, § 8034; C.S.1929, § 8-128; R.S.1943, § 8-130; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 19, p. 141; Laws 1967, c. 19, § 5, p. 119; Laws 1973, LB 164, § 7; Laws 1977, LB 40, § 41. |
This section is referred to as providing penalty of fine and imprisonment, in contrasting this section with another section of the banking act which failed to provide a penalty, and holding that the failure to provide a penalty disclosed legislative intent that statute should be directory rather than mandatory. State ex rel. Davis v. Farmers State Bank of Winside, 112 Neb. 597, 200 N.W. 173 (1924).
8-120
Corporation; application to conduct, merge, or transfer bank; contents.(1) Every corporation organized for and desiring to conduct a bank or to conduct a bank for purposes of a merger with an existing bank shall make under oath and transmit to the department a complete detailed application giving (a) the name of the proposed bank; (b) a certified copy of the articles of incorporation; (c) the names of the stockholders; (d) the county, city, or village and the exact location therein in which such bank is proposed to be located; (e) the nature of the proposed banking business; (f) the proposed amounts of paid-up capital stock and surplus, and the items of actual cash and property, as reported and approved at a meeting of the stockholders, to be included in such amounts; and (g) a statement that at least twenty percent of the amounts stated in subdivision (f) of this subsection have in fact been paid in to the corporation by its stockholders.
(2) In the case of a merger, the existing bank which is to be merged into shall complete an application and meet the requirements of this section.
(3) This section also applies when application is made for transfer of a bank charter and move of a bank's main office to any location other than (a) within the corporate limits of the city or village of its original charter, (b) within the county in which it is located if such bank charter is not located in a city or village, or (c) as provided in subdivision (6) of section 8-115.01.
| Source | Laws 1909, c. 10, § 15, p. 74; R.S.1913, § 294; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVI, § 15, p. 691; Laws 1921, c. 313, § 1, p. 1001; C.S.1922, § 7996; C.S.1929, § 8-126; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 17, p. 143; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-126; R.S.1943, § 8-128; Laws 1959, c. 15, § 9, p. 135; R.R.S.1943, § 8-128; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 20, p. 142; Laws 1967, c. 19, § 7, p. 120; Laws 1980, LB 916, § 1; Laws 2002, LB 957, § 2; Laws 2005, LB 533, § 4; Laws 2008, LB851, § 3.July 18, 2008 |
Where it appears in an error proceeding that an administrative agency acted within its jurisdiction and there is some competent evidence to sustain its findings and order, the order will be sustained. First Nat. Bank of Bellevue v. Southroads Bank, 189 Neb. 748, 205 N.W.2d 346 (1973).Preliminary statement, without articles of incorporation, was sufficient. First Nat. Bank & Trust Co. of Beatrice v. Ley, 182 Neb. 164, 153 N.W.2d 743 (1967).
8-121
Corporation; examination of application by department; charter approval intended; certificate; issuance.If the department, upon examination of the application required by section 8-120, is satisfied that such corporation has complied with the requirements of the Nebraska Banking Act and if charter approval is intended, it shall issue to such corporation a certificate stating that such corporation has complied with the laws of this state, advising of any requirements which must be met.
| Source | Laws 1909, c. 10, § 14, p. 73; Laws 1911, c. 8, § 14, p. 79; R.S.1913, § 293; Laws 1919, c. 90, tit. V, art. XVI, § 14, p. 691; Laws 1921, c. 302, § 1, p. 957; C.S.1922, § 7995; Laws 1925, c. 28, § 2, p. 120; C.S.1929, § 8-125; Laws 1930, Spec. Sess., c. 6, § 15, p. 33; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 16, p. 143; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-125; R.S.1943, § 8-127; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 21, p. 142; Laws 1967, c. 19, § 8, p. 120; Laws 1973, LB 164, § 8; Laws 1987, LB 2, § 5; Laws 1998, LB 1321, § 5. |
Charter and certificate may issue although all requirements have not been met. First Nat. Bank & Trust Co. of Beatrice v. Ley, 182 Neb. 164, 153 N.W.2d 743 (1967).
8-122
Issuance of charter to transact business.(1) After the examination and approval by the department of the application required by section 8-120, if the department upon investigation and after any public hearing on the application held pursuant to section 8-115.01 shall be satisfied that the stockholders and officers of the corporation applying for such charter are parties of integrity and responsibility, that the requirements of section 8-702 have been met, and that the public necessity, convenience, and advantage will be promoted by permitting such corporation to engage in business as a bank, the department shall, upon the payment of the required fees, and, upon the filing with the department of a statement, under oath, of the president, secretary, or treasurer, that the paid-up capital stock and surplus have been paid in, as determined by the department in accordance with section 8-116, issue to such corporation a charter to transact the business of a bank in this state provided for in its articles of incorporation. In the case of a bank organized to merge with an existing bank, there shall be a rebuttable presumption that the public necessity, convenience, and advantage will be met by the merger of the two banks, except that such presumption shall not apply when the new bank that is formed by the merger is at a different location than that of the former existing bank. Any application for merger under this subsection shall be subject to section 8-1516.
(2) On payment of the required fees and the receipt of the charter, such corporation may begin to conduct a bank.
| Source | Laws 1909, c. 10, § 16, p. 74; Laws 1911, c. 8, § 1, p. 79; R.S.1913, § 295; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVI, § 16, p. 692; Laws 1921, c. 302, § 2, p. 958; C.S.1922, § 7997; C.S.1929, § 8-127; R.S.1943, § 8-129; Laws 1947, c. 12, § 1, p. 77; Laws 1957, c. 10, § 1, p. 128; R.R.S.1943, § 8-129; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 22, p. 142; Laws 1967, c. 19, § 9, p. 120; Laws 1980, LB 916, § 2; Laws 1983, LB 252, § 3; Laws 1996, LB 1275, § 2; Laws 2002, LB 957, § 3; Laws 2002, LB 1094, § 4; Laws 2008, LB851, § 4.July 18, 2008 |
The Department of Banking and Finance is required to hold a public hearing to determine, among other things, the integrity of the parties applying for a bank merger and the fairness of the merger to minority shareholders. Schmid v. Clarke, Inc., 245 Neb. 856, 515 N.W.2d 665 (1994).When more than one application is filed for a given license, the Department of Banking and Finance should compare the applications rather than follow a strict first-to-file rule. Southwestern Bank & Trust Co. v. Department of Banking and Finance, 206 Neb. 599, 294 N.W.2d 343 (1980).This section involves the granting of a bank charter and not the removal of one. Douglas County Bank v. Department of Banking, 187 Neb. 545, 192 N.W.2d 401 (1971).Finding of Department of Banking in the language of this section is adequate to sustain the issuance of a charter. First Nat. Bank & Trust Co. v. Ley, 182 Neb. 164, 153 N.W.2d 743 (1967).When an application is made to Department of Banking for a charter to do a banking business, it is its duty to determine, after proper investigation, the integrity and responsibility of the persons making the application. Shumway v. Warrick, 108 Neb. 652, 189 N.W. 301 (1922).Where it appears that Department of Banking, in granting a charter, has acted within its jurisdiction, and all the jurisdictional facts essential to uphold its final order are sustained by competent evidence, its action will be upheld on review in error proceedings. In re Commercial State Bank, 105 Neb. 248, 179 N.W.1021 (1920).Under this section, prior to its amendment in 1921, where a corporation filed the oath that the capital stock had been paid in, and if parties were of integrity and responsibility and paid the fees required by law, the corporation was entitled to a charter irrespective of the number of banks in the locality. State ex rel. Woolridge v. Morehead, 100 Neb. 864, 161 N.W. 569 (1917), L.R.A. 1917D 310 (1917).
8-122.01
Repealed. Laws 2002, LB 1094,§19.
8-123
Transferred to section 8-1902.
8-124
Banks; board of directors; officers; term; meetings; examination; audit.The affairs and business of any bank chartered after September 2, 1973, or which has had transfer of twenty-five percent or more of voting shares after September 2, 1973, shall be managed or controlled by a board of directors of not less than five and not more than fifteen members, who shall be selected at such time and in such manner as may be provided by the articles of incorporation of the corporation and in conformity with the Nebraska Banking Act. Any bank chartered before September 2, 1973, may have a minimum of three directors and not more than fifteen directors so long as it does not have transfer of twenty-five percent or more voting shares, with such directors selected as provided in this section. Any vacancy on the board shall be filled within ninety days by appointment by the remaining directors, and any director so appointed shall serve until the next election of directors, except that if the vacancy created leaves a minimum of five directors, appointment shall be optional. The board shall appoint a secretary and, from among its own members, select a president. Such officers shall hold their office at the pleasure of the board of directors. The board of directors shall hold at least one regular meeting in each calendar quarter, and at one of such meetings in each year a thorough examination of the books, records, funds, and securities held by the bank shall be made and recorded in detail upon its record book. In lieu of the one annual examination required, the board of directors may accept one annual audit by an accountant or accounting firm approved by the Director of Banking and Finance.
| Source | Laws 1909, c. 10, § 26, p. 78; Laws 1911, c. 8, § 26, p. 81; R.S.1913, § 305; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVI, § 26, p. 696; C.S.1922, § 8007; C.S.1929, § 8-138; R.S.1943, § 8-140; Laws 1961, c. 15, § 4, p. 112; R.R.S.1943, § 8-140; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 24, p. 143; Laws 1967, c. 21, § 1, p. 123; Laws 1973, LB 164, § 9; Laws 1974, LB 721, § 2; Laws 1987, LB 2, § 6; Laws 1998, LB 1321, § 6; Laws 2005, LB 533, § 5; Laws 2007, LB124, § 3. |
Terms of office of a bank officer are required to be for one year. Sullivan v. David City Bank, 181 Neb. 395, 148 N.W.2d 844 (1967).Person who permits himself to be held out as director of bank is estopped to deny that he was owner of sufficient shares in his own right to qualify as director. Kienke v. Kirsch, 121 Neb. 688, 238 N.W. 33 (1931).Buying capital stock of rival bank not an ordinary banking transaction within the powers of a stockholder, the president, a single director, or all combined. Cooper v. Bane, 110 Neb. 83, 196 N.W. 119 (1923).
8-124.01
Banks; board of directors; vacancy; notice; filling; notice.At any time that a vacancy on the board of directors of a bank occurs, the bank shall, within thirty days, notify the department of the vacancy. Vacancies shall be filled within ninety days by appointment by the remaining directors, except that if the vacancy created leaves a minimum of five directors, appointment shall be optional. When the vacancy has been filled, the bank shall notify the department that the vacancy has been filled and include in the notice the name, address, and occupation of the director appointed.
| Source | Laws 1973, LB 164, § 10; Laws 1995, LB 599, § 1. |
8-125
Banks; board of directors; meetings; record; contents; publication.A full and complete record of the proceedings and business of all meetings of the board of directors shall be spread upon the bank's minutes. Such record of the meetings shall show the gross earnings and disposition thereof by indicating expenses and taxes paid, worthless items charged off, depreciation in assets, amount carried to surplus fund, and amount of dividend, and shall also indicate the amount of undivided profits remaining. Published statements of assets and liabilities shall show for undivided profits only the net amount after deducting all expenses.
| Source | Laws 1923, c. 191, § 37, p. 458; C.S.1929, § 8-139; R.S.1943, § 8-141; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 25, p. 144. |
8-126
Bank directors; qualifications; approval by department; revocation of approval; procedure.A majority of the members of the board of directors of any bank transacting business under the Nebraska Banking Act shall have their residences in this state or within twenty-five miles of the main office of the bank. Reasonable efforts shall be made to acquire members of such board of directors from the county in which such bank is located. Directors of banks shall be persons of good moral character, known integrity, business experience, and responsibility. No person shall act as a member of the board of directors of any bank until such bank applies for and obtains approval from the Department of Banking and Finance.
If the department, upon investigation, determines that any director of a bank is conducting the business of the bank in an unsafe or unauthorized manner or is endangering the interests of the stockholders or depositors, the department shall have authority, following notice and opportunity for hearing, to revoke such approval to act as a member of the board of directors. The department may adopt and promulgate rules and regulations and prescribe forms to carry out this section.
| Source | Laws 1909, c. 10, § 12, p. 71; R.S.1913, § 291; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVI, § 10, p. 689; Laws 1921, c. 313, § 1, p. 1001; C.S.1922, § 7991; C.S.1929, § 8-121; Laws 1935, c. 7, § 1, p. 70; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-121; R.S.1943, § 8-118; Laws 1959, c. 15, § 2, p. 132; R.R.S.1943, § 8-118; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 26, p. 144; Laws 1973, LB 164, § 11; Laws 1986, LB 1035, § 1; Laws 1987, LB 2, § 7; Laws 1988, LB 996, § 1; Laws 1989, LB 322, § 1; Laws 1993, LB 81, § 2; Laws 1997, LB 137, § 3; Laws 1998, LB 1321, § 7. |
Under former law a director of commercial state bank must have been the owner of at least four percent of its capital stock in his own name and right, and a person having acted as director was estopped to deny ownership of stock standing in his name. Kienke v. Hudson, 122 Neb. 475, 240 N.W. 562 (1932); Kienke v. Kirsch, 121 Neb. 688, 238 N.W. 33 (1931).
8-127
List of stockholders; open to inspection; violation; penalty.The president and cashier, or the business manager, of every bank shall cause to be kept at all times a full and correct list of the names and residences of all its stockholders, the number of shares held by each, and the amount of paid-up capital represented thereby. Such list shall be subject to the inspection of all stockholders of the bank during all business hours, and shall be kept in the business office where all stockholders may have ready access to it. Any person violating this section shall be guilty of a Class III misdemeanor.
| Source | Laws 1909, c. 10, § 38, p. 85; R.S.1913, § 317; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVI, § 38, p. 701; C.S.1922, § 8018; C.S.1929, § 8-157; R.S.1943, § 8-162; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 27, p. 145; Laws 1977, LB 40, § 42. |
8-128
Capital stock; increase; decrease; notice; publication; denial by department, when.The paid-in capital stock of any bank may be increased or decreased in the following manner: The stockholders at any regular meeting or at any special meeting duly called for such purpose shall by vote of those owning two-thirds of the capital stock authorize the president or cashier to notify the department of the proposed increase or reduction of paid-in capital stock, and a notice containing a statement of the amount of any proposed reduction of paid-in capital stock shall be published for four weeks in some newspaper published and of general circulation in the county where such bank is located. Reduction of paid-in capital stock shall be discretionary with the department, but shall be denied if granting the same would reduce the paid-in capital stock below the requirements of the Nebraska Banking Act or would impair the security of the depositors. The bank shall notify the department when the proposed increase or decrease of the paid-in capital stock has been consummated.
| Source | Laws 1909, c. 10, § 34, p. 82; R.S.1913, § 313; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVI, § 34, p. 699; C.S.1922, § 8014; C.S.1929, § 8-153; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 34, p. 152; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-153; R.S.1943, § 8-157; Laws 1961, c. 15, § 7, p. 113; R.R.S.1943, § 8-157; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 28, p. 145; Laws 1987, LB 2, § 8; Laws 1998, LB 1321, § 8. |
8-129
Stockholders' meeting; Director of Banking and Finance may call; notice; expense.Whenever the director shall deem it expedient he may call a meeting of the stockholders of any bank organized under the laws of this state, by mailing notice of such meeting to each stockholder five days previous thereto. All necessary expenses incurred in the giving of such notice shall be borne by the bank whose stockholders are required to convene.
| Source | Laws 1933, c. 18, § 41, p. 157; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-1,126; R.S.1943, § 8-1,106; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 29, p. 146. |
8-130
Federal reserve system; membership by state banks and trust companies authorized; examinations.Any bank or trust company, incorporated under the laws of this state, shall have power to subscribe to the capital stock of the Federal Reserve Bank of Kansas City, Missouri, and become a member of the federal reserve system created and organized under an act of Congress of the United States, approved December 23, 1913, and known as the Federal Reserve Act, and shall have power to assume such liabilities and to exercise such powers as a member of such system as are prescribed by the provisions of such act, or amendments thereto. So long as such bank or trust company shall remain a member of such system, it shall be subject to examination by the legally constituted authorities, and to all provisions of such Federal Reserve Act and regulations made pursuant thereto by the Federal Reserve Board which are applicable to such bank or trust company as a member of the federal reserve system. The state authorities may, in their discretion, accept examinations and audits made under the provisions of the Federal Reserve Act in lieu of examinations required of banks or trust companies organized under the laws of this state.
| Source | Laws 1915, c. 175, § 1, p. 359; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVI, § 65, p. 711; C.S.1922, § 8045; C.S.1929, § 8-163; R.S.1943, § 8-166; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 30, p. 146. |
8-131
Repealed. Laws 2003, LB 217, § 50.
8-132
Banks; available funds; deficient reserve; impairment of capital; duty of bank; powers and duties of department; notice to bank.The available funds of a bank shall consist of cash on hand and balances due from other solvent banks approved by the department. Cash shall include lawful money of the United States and exchange for any clearinghouse association. Whenever the available funds or any reserve of any bank are deemed deficient by the department, such bank shall not make any new loans or discount otherwise than by discounting or purchasing bills of exchange payable at sight or make any dividends of its profits until it has on hand available funds and reserve deemed sufficient for operation by the department. The department shall notify any bank, in case its available funds or reserves are deemed deficient or its capital is impaired, to make good such available funds, reserves, or capital within such time as the department may direct, and any failure of such bank to make good any deficiency in the amount of its available funds, reserve, or capital within the time directed shall be cause for the director to take possession of such bank, declare it insolvent, and liquidate it as provided in the Nebraska Banking Act.
| Source | Laws 1909, c. 10, § 23, p. 77; R.S.1913, § 302; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVI, § 23, p. 695; C.S.1922, § 8004; C.S.1929, § 8-135; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 24, p. 147; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-135; R.S.1943, § 8-137; R.R.S.1943, § 8-137; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 32, p. 147; Laws 1965, c. 28, § 1, p. 200; Laws 1987, LB 2, § 9; Laws 1998, LB 1321, § 9; Laws 2003, LB 217, § 4. |
8-132.01
Impairment of capital; amortization of loan losses; authorized; conditions.Whenever any examination of a bank reveals that loan losses have occurred at the bank to the extent that the capital of the bank is impaired and additional capitalization is required, such bank shall, after meeting the following qualification, be allowed to amortize such loan losses over a period of seven years. In order to meet the amortization qualification, the bank shall submit a written plan to the Director of Banking and Finance outlining specific steps the bank intends to take to avoid further deterioration and to return to profitability. The director shall have the authority to accept or reject such plan for qualification and, if accepted, shall insure that such plan is regularly reviewed.
| Source | Laws 1986, LB 983, § 1; Laws 1989, LB 296, § 1. |
8-133
Rate of interest; inducements prohibited;
penalties; pledge of letters
of credit authorized; notice required.(1) A
state-chartered bank may pay interest at any rate on any deposits made or
retained in the bank.
(2) Any officer, director, stockholder, or employee of a bank or any
other person who directly or indirectly, either personally or for the bank,
pays any money, gives any consideration of value, or pledges any assets, except
as provided by law, as an inducement, in addition to the legal interest, for
making or retaining a deposit in the bank shall be guilty of a Class IV felony.
Any depositor who accepts any such inducement shall be guilty of a Class IV
felony. Deposits made in violation of this section shall not be entitled to
priority of payment from the assets of the bank. In determining the maximum
interest that may be paid on deposits, the bank shall consider generally recognized
sound banking principles, the financial soundness of banks, competitive conditions,
and general economic conditions.
(3) A bank may secure deposits made by a trustee under 11 U.S.C. 101
et seq. by pledge of the assets of the bank or by furnishing a surety bond
as provided in 11 U.S.C. 345. A bank may also secure deposits made by the
United States Secretary of the Interior on behalf of any individual Indian
or any Indian tribe under 25 U.S.C. 162a by a pledge of the assets of the
bank or by furnishing an acceptable bond as provided in 25 U.S.C. 162a.
(4) Nothing in this section shall prohibit a bank or any officer, director,
stockholder, or employee thereof from providing to a depositor a guaranty
bond or an irrevocable, nontransferable,
unconditional standby letter of credit issued by the Federal Home Loan Bank
of Topeka which provides coverage for the deposits of the depositor
which are in excess of the amounts insured by the Federal Deposit Insurance
Corporation. Any bank which
offers letters of credit for consideration to depositors pursuant to this
section shall post a notice in the lobby of each office of such bank stating
that letters of credit issued by the Federal Home Loan Bank of Topeka which
provide coverage for deposits in excess of the amounts insured by the Federal
Deposit Insurance Corporation may be available to depositors of the bank.
Provision of a letter of credit issued by the Federal Home Loan Bank of Topeka
by a bank to a depositor shall be at the discretion of the bank. The notice
required under this section shall be sufficient if made in substantially the
following form:
Notice
This bank is a member
of the Federal Home Loan Bank of Topeka and offers for consideration Federal
Home Loan Bank of Topeka letters of credit which provide coverage for deposits
in excess of the amounts insured by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation.
Please contact a representative of the bank to determine if such a letter
of credit is available to you.
| Source | Laws 1909, c. 10, § 27, p. 79; Laws 1911, c. 8, § 27, p. 81; R.S.1913, § 306; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVI, § 27, p. 696; Laws 1921, c. 313, § 1, p. 1001; C.S.1922, § 8008; Laws 1925, c. 28, § 1, p. 119; C.S.1929, § 8-140; Laws 1930, Spec. Sess., c. 6, § 8, p. 30; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 26, p. 148; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-140; R.S.1943, § 8-142; Laws 1959, c. 15, § 12, p. 136; R.R.S.1943, § 8-142; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 33, p. 147; Laws 1977, LB 40, § 43; Laws 1978, LB 966, § 1; Laws 1980, LB 966, § 1; Laws 1990, LB 956, § 1; Laws 1994, LB 979, § 1; Laws 1996, LB 1053, § 4; Laws 2003, LB 217, § 5; Laws 2009, LB74, § 1.March 6, 2009 |
1. Excessive interest2. Other inducements1. Excessive interestTo make a prima facie case on claim against receiver of insolvent state bank, claimant need only plead and prove ownership of duly issued certificate of deposit. State ex rel. Sorensen v. State Bank of Bee, 128 Neb. 491, 259 N.W. 641 (1935).Where interest at a greater rate than the maximum allowed by law is paid on certificates of deposit, the claim of the depositor in receivership is not entitled to priority. State ex rel. Sorensen v. State Bank of Bee, 128 Neb. 442, 259 N.W. 172 (1935).Where holder of certificate on which excess interest has been paid surrenders such certificate to the bank and receives a bill payable, which is transferred to another, and such other person presents it to the bank while it is a going concern and receives in exchange a certificate of deposit drawing interest at the legal rate, such certificate is entitled to priority. State ex rel. Spillman v. Farmers Bank of Crawford, 116 Neb. 445, 217 N.W. 950 (1928).Where certificate draws lawful rate but from date anterior to its issuance, transaction was not a deposit entitled to priority. State ex rel. Spillman v. Security Bank of Eddyville, 116 Neb. 165, 216 N.W. 169 (1927).Where money was placed in a state bank and certificate of deposit issued bearing lawful rate of interest with understanding that bank should pay bonus of one percent above legal rate, transaction was not a deposit entitled to priority. State ex rel. Spillman v. Security State Bank of Eddyville , 115 Neb. 667, 214 N.W. 293 (1927); Iams v. Farmers State Bank of Decatur, 101 Neb. 778, 165 N.W. 145 (1917).Where agreement was that bank officer individually should pay the excess interest, but, without knowledge of certificate holder, the bank actually pays it, deposit was entitled to priority. State ex rel. Spillman v. Atlas Bank of Neligh, 114 Neb. 781, 210 N.W. 152 (1926); State ex rel. Davis v. Farmers State Bank of Benedict, 112 Neb. 474, 199 N.W. 839 (1924).Where interest at a rate greater than the maximum allowed has been paid by a state bank, but such practice is abandoned while the bank is a going concern, certificates issued in renewal at a lawful rate are entitled to priority, even though such renewals include accumulations of excess interest. State ex rel. Spillman v. American Exchange Bank of Bristow, 114 Neb. 626, 209 N.W. 217 (1926).Where agreement for excess interest is a closed transaction, it may be abandoned without tainting future deposits. State ex rel. Davis v. Newcastle State Bank, 114 Neb. 389, 207 N.W. 683 (1926).Where holder of certificates drawing excessive rate exchanges them for new certificates drawing legal rate, while bank is going concern, the new certificates are entitled to priority. State ex rel. Spillman v. American Exchange Bank of Bristow, 112 Neb. 834, 201 N.W. 895 (1924).Prohibition of this section does not prevent an officer of a bank, while acting in good faith, from paying additional interest on his personal account, and deposit made under such arrangement is not deprived of priority. State ex rel. Davis v. Wayne County Bank, 112 Neb. 792, 201 N.W. 907 (1924).Where secret agreement for excess interest has been abandoned, new certificate for actual amount deposited, bearing lawful rate, not vitiated. State ex rel. Davis v. Farmers State Bank of Winside, 112 Neb. 788, 201 N.W. 899 (1924).This section bearing penalty contrasted with section providing no penalty. State ex rel. Davis v. Farmers State Bank of Winside, 112 Neb. 597, 200 N.W. 173 (1924).Where bank issued certificates of deposit bearing interest at maximum legal rate and received in exchange an amount less than the face of the certificates, deposit was not entitled to priority. State ex rel. Davis v. Farmers State Bank of Halsey, 111 Neb. 117, 196 N.W. 908 (1923).Where deposit is represented by cashier's check which includes excess interest, it is not entitled to priority. State ex rel. Davis v. Banking House of A. Castetter, 110 Neb. 564, 194 N.W. 784 (1923).2. Other inducementsAgreement between stockholders of bank and its depositors and creditors that bank was to be liquidated by its officers, did not contravene this section. Department of Banking v. Walker, 131 Neb. 732, 269 N.W. 907 (1936).Where another statutory provision requires deposit of public money in bank to be secured, deposit subject to negotiations between bank and city, provisions of this section do not apply. Luikart v. City of Aurora, 125 Neb. 263, 249 N.W. 590 (1933).Pledge of assets by bank to secure or retain deposit is inducement to depositor to make such deposit, and both the bank official and depositor are subject to criminal prosecution. Bliss v. Pathfinder Irrigation District, 122 Neb. 203, 240 N.W. 291 (1932).Arrangement for "parring" checks, resulting in slight advantage above legal rate to depositor, does not deprive him of priority. State ex rel. Spillman v. Nebraska State Bank of Harvard, 118 Neb. 660, 225 N.W. 778 (1929).
8-134
Deposits; repayment only on presentation of pass book, when; notice.Banks may, by agreement, provide that deposits received under agreement shall be repaid only on presentation of pass books and may require notice to be given before such deposits are repaid.
| Source | Laws 1963, c. 29, § 34, p. 148. |
8-135
Deposits; withdrawal methods authorized; section; how construed.(1) All persons, regardless of age, may become depositors in any bank and shall be subject to the same duties and liabilities respecting their deposits. Whenever a deposit is accepted by any bank in the name of any person, regardless of age, the deposit may be withdrawn by the depositor by any of the following methods:
(a) Check or other instrument in writing. The check or other instrument in writing constitutes a receipt or acquittance if the check or other instrument in writing is signed by the depositor and constitutes a valid release and discharge to the bank for all payments so made; or
(b) Electronic means through:
(i) Preauthorized direct withdrawal;
(ii) An automatic teller machine;
(iii) A debit card;
(iv) A transfer by telephone;
(v) A network, including the Internet; or
(vi) Any electronic terminal, computer, magnetic tape, or other electronic means.
(2) This section shall not be construed to affect the rights, liabilities, or responsibilities of participants in an electronic fund transfer under the federal Electronic Fund Transfer Act, 15 U.S.C. 1693 et seq., as it existed on September 4, 2005, and shall not affect the legal relationships between a minor and any person other than the bank.
| Source | Laws 1963, c. 27, § 1, p. 132; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 35, p. 148; Laws 2005, LB 533, § 6. |
8-136
Repealed. Laws 1974, LB 354,§316.
8-137
Checks; certification; requirements; effect.No officer or employee of any bank shall certify any check drawn upon such bank unless the person, firm, or corporation drawing the check has on deposit with the bank at the time such check is certified an amount of credit, on the depositors' ledger of such bank, subject to the payment of such check, equal to the amount specified in such check; but the amount of such check shall not be recoverable from the payee or holder except in case of fraud. Whenever a check drawn upon any bank is certified by any officer or employee of such bank, the amount thereof shall be immediately charged against the account of the person, firm, or corporation drawing the same.
| Source | Laws 1909, c. 10, § 39, p. 85; R.S.1913, § 318; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVI, § 39, p. 701; C.S.1922, § 8019; C.S.1929, § 8-158; R.S.1943, § 8-163; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 37, p. 149. |
8-138
Deposits; receiving when insolvent; prohibition; penalty.No bank shall accept or receive on deposit for any purpose any money, bank bills, United States treasury notes or currency, or other notes, bills, checks, drafts, credits, or currency, when such bank is insolvent; and if any bank shall receive or accept on deposit any such deposits when such bank is insolvent, the officer, agent, or employee knowingly receiving or accepting or being accessory to, or permitting or conniving at the receiving or accepting on deposit therein or thereby, any such deposit shall be guilty of a Class III felony.
| Source | Laws 1909, c. 10, § 30, p. 80; R.S.1913, § 309; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVI, § 30, p. 697; C.S.1922, § 8010; C.S.1929, § 8-147; R.S.1943, § 8-147; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 38, p. 149; Laws 1977, LB 40, § 44. |
Insolvent bank has no power to receive deposits. Torgeson v. Department of Trade and Commerce, 127 Neb. 38, 254 N.W. 735 (1934).In prosecution against banker for receiving deposits knowing bank to be insolvent, intentional fraud, deceit, false reports and wrongful entries on bank books are not elements of the offense as defined by statute. Flannigan v. State, 125 Neb. 519, 250 N.W. 908 (1933).Instruction to jury defining insolvency of bank as being when the actual cash value of its assets was insufficient to pay its liabilities to depositors, or when it was unable to meet the demands of its creditors in the usual and ordinary manner, was not prejudicial to defendant. Gutru v. State, 125 Neb. 506, 250 N.W. 913 (1933).Conviction under this section sustained upon evidence that deposits were received when real value of assets were less than liabilities of bank, and defendant had knowledge of the deposits and insolvency. Flannigan v. State, 125 Neb. 163, 249 N.W. 609 (1933).Banking department has no authority to authorize a bank, its officers or employees, to violate this section. State v. Kastle, 120 Neb. 758, 235 N.W. 458 (1931).Constitutionality of this section sustained. Westbrook v. State, 120 Neb. 625, 234 N.W. 579 (1931).This section bearing penalty contrasted with section providing no penalty. State ex rel. Davis v. Farmers State Bank of Winside, 112 Neb. 597, 200 N.W. 173 (1924).
8-139
Executive officers; approval of loans and investments; qualifications; license; revocation; regulations; forms; violations; penalty.No loan or investment shall be made by a bank, directly or indirectly, without the approval of an active executive officer. Executive officers of banks shall be persons of good moral character, known integrity, business experience and responsibility, and be capable of conducting the affairs of a bank on sound banking principles. No person shall act as an active executive officer of any bank until such bank shall apply for and obtain from the department a license for such person to so act. If the department, upon investigation, shall be satisfied that any active executive officer of a bank is conducting its business in an unsafe or unauthorized manner, or is endangering the interests of the stockholders or depositors, the department shall have authority to revoke such license. Any person who shall act or attempt to act as an active executive officer of any bank, except under a license from the department, or anyone who shall permit or assist such person to act or attempt to act as such, shall be guilty of a Class III felony. The department may make and enforce reasonable regulations and prescribe forms to be used to carry out the intent of this section.
| Source | Laws 1921, c. 297, § 7, p. 952; C.S.1922, § 8048; C.S.1929, § 8-166; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 38, p. 154; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-166; R.S.1943, § 8-169; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 39, p. 150; Laws 1977, LB 40, § 45. |
8-140
Repealed. Laws 1994, LB 611,§4.
8-141
Loans; limits; exceptions.(1) No bank shall directly or indirectly loan to any single corporation, limited liability company, firm, or individual, including in such loans all loans made to the several members or shareholders of such firm, limited liability company, or corporation, for the use and benefit of such corporation, limited liability company, firm, or individual, more than twenty-five percent of the paid-up capital, surplus, and capital notes and debentures or fifteen percent of the unimpaired capital and unimpaired surplus of such bank, whichever is greater. Such limitations shall be subject to the following exceptions:
(a) Obligations of any person, partnership, limited liability company, association, or corporation in the form of notes or drafts secured by shipping documents or instruments transferring or securing title covering livestock or giving a lien on livestock, when the market value of the livestock securing the obligation is not at any time less than one hundred fifteen percent of the face amount of the notes covered by such documents, shall be subject under this section to a limitation of ten percent of such capital, surplus, and capital notes and debentures or ten percent of such unimpaired capital and unimpaired surplus, whichever is greater, in addition to such twenty-five percent of such capital and surplus or such fifteen percent of such unimpaired capital and unimpaired surplus;
(b) Obligations of any person, partnership, limited liability company, association, or corporation secured by not less than a like amount of bonds or notes of the United States issued since April 24, 1917, or certificates of indebtedness of the United States, treasury bills of the United States, or obligations fully guaranteed both as to principal and interest by the United States shall be subject under this section to a limitation of ten percent of such capital, surplus, and capital notes and debentures or ten percent of such unimpaired capital and unimpaired surplus, whichever is greater, in addition to such twenty-five percent of such capital and surplus or such fifteen percent of such unimpaired capital and unimpaired surplus;
(c) Obligations of any person, partnership, limited liability company, association, or corporation which are secured by negotiable warehouse receipts in an amount not less than one hundred fifteen percent of the face amount of the note or notes secured by such documents shall be subject under this section to a limitation of ten percent of such capital, surplus, and capital notes and debentures or ten percent of such unimpaired capital and unimpaired surplus, whichever is greater, in addition to such twenty-five percent of such capital and surplus or such fifteen percent of such unimpaired capital and unimpaired surplus; or
(d) Obligations of any person, partnership, limited liability company, association, or corporation which are secured by readily marketable collateral having a market value, as determined by reliable and continuously available price quotations, in an amount at least equal to the face amount of the note or notes secured by such collateral, shall be subject under this section to a limitation of ten percent of such capital, surplus, and capital notes and debentures or ten percent of such unimpaired capital and unimpaired surplus, whichever is greater, in addition to such twenty-five percent of such capital and surplus or such fifteen percent of such unimpaired capital and unimpaired surplus.
(2) For purposes of this section, the discounting of bills of exchange, drawn in good faith against actually existing values, and the discounting of commercial paper actually owned by the persons negotiating the same shall not be considered as the lending of money. Loans or obligations shall not be subject to any limitation under this section, based upon such capital and surplus or such unimpaired capital and unimpaired surplus, to the extent that they are secured or covered by guaranties, or by commitments or agreements to take over or to purchase the same, made by any federal reserve bank or by the United States Government or any authorized agency thereof, including any corporation wholly owned directly or indirectly by the United States, or general obligations of any state of the United States or any political subdivision thereof. The phrase general obligation of any state or any political subdivision thereof means an obligation supported by the full faith and credit of an obligor possessing general powers of taxation, including property taxation, but does not include municipal revenue bonds and sanitary and improvement district warrants which are subject to the limitations set forth in this section. Any bank may subscribe to, invest in, purchase, and own single-family mortgages secured by the Federal Housing Administration or the United States Department of Veterans Affairs and mortgage-backed certificates of the Government National Mortgage Association which are guaranteed as to payment of principal and interest by the Government National Mortgage Association. Such mortgages and certificates shall not be subject under this section to any limitation based upon such capital and surplus or such unimpaired capital and unimpaired surplus. Obligations representing loans to any national banking association or to any banking institution organized under the laws of any state, when such loans are approved by the Director of Banking and Finance by regulation or otherwise, shall not be subject under this section to any limitation based upon such capital and surplus or such unimpaired capital and unimpaired surplus. Loans or extensions of credit secured by a segregated deposit account in the lending bank shall not be subject under this section to any limitation based on such capital and surplus or such unimpaired capital and unimpaired surplus. The department may adopt and promulgate rules and regulations governing the terms and conditions of such security interest and segregated deposit account. For the purpose of determining lending limits, partnerships shall not be treated as separate entities. Each individual shall be charged with his or her personal debt plus the debt of every partnership in which he or she is a partner, except that for purposes of this section (a) an individual shall only be charged with the debt of any limited partnership in which he or she is a partner to the extent that the terms of the limited partnership agreement provide that such individual is to be held liable for the debts or actions of such limited partnership and (b) no individual shall be charged with the debt of any general partnership in which he or she is a partner beyond the extent to which (i) his or her liability for such partnership debt is limited by the terms of a contract or other written agreement between the bank and such individual and (ii) any personal debt of such individual is incurred for the use and benefit of such general partnership.
(3) A loan made within lending limits at the initial time the loan was made may be renewed, extended, or serviced without regard to changes in the lending limit of a bank following the initial extension of the loan if (a) the renewal, extension, or servicing of the loan does not result in the extension of funds beyond the initial amount of the loan or (b) the accrued interest on the loan is not added to the original amount of the loan in the process of renewal, extension, or servicing.
(4) Any bank may purchase or take an interest in life insurance contracts for any purpose incidental to the business of banking. A bank's purchase of any life insurance contract, as measured by its cash surrender value, from any one life insurance company shall not at any time exceed twenty-five percent of the paid-up capital, surplus, and capital notes and debentures of such bank or fifteen percent of the paid-up capital, surplus, undivided profits, and capital notes and debentures of such bank, whichever is greater. A bank's purchase of life insurance contracts, as measured by their cash surrender values, in the aggregate from all life insurance companies shall not at any time exceed thirty-five percent of the paid-up capital, surplus, undivided profits, and capital notes and debentures of such bank. The limitations under this subsection on a bank's purchase of life insurance contracts, in the aggregate from all life insurance companies, shall not apply to any contract purchased prior to April 5, 1994.
(5) For purposes of this section, unimpaired capital and unimpaired surplus means (a) the bank's tier 1 and tier 2 capital included in the bank's risk-based capital under the capital guidelines of the appropriate federal banking agency, based on the bank's most recent consolidated report of condition filed under 12 U.S.C. 1817(a)(3), and (b) the balance of the bank's allowance for loan and lease losses not included in the bank's tier 2 capital for purposes of the calculation of risk-based capital by the appropriate federal banking agency, based on the bank's most recent consolidated report of condition filed under 12 U.S.C. 1817(a)(3). Notwithstanding the provisions of section 8-1,140, the department may, by order, deny or limit the inclusion of goodwill in the calculation of a bank's unimpaired capital and unimpaired surplus or in the calculation of a bank's paid-up capital and surplus.
| Source | Laws 1909, c. 10, § 33, p. 81; R.S.1913, § 312; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVI, § 33, p. 698; Laws 1921, c. 313, § 1, p. 1002; C.S.1922, § 8013; Laws 1923, c. 191, § 45, p. 461; C.S.1929, § 8-150; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 33, p. 151; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-150; Laws 1943, c. 9, § 1(1), p. 67; R.S.1943, § 8-150; Laws 1959, c. 15, § 14, p. 137; R.R.S.1943, § 8-150; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 41, p. 151; Laws 1965, c. 28, § 3, p. 201; Laws 1969, c. 35, § 1, p. 241; Laws 1972, LB 1151, § 1; Laws 1973, LB 164, § 13; Laws 1986, LB 983, § 2; Laws 1987, LB 753, § 1; Laws 1988, LB 788, § 1; Laws 1990, LB 956, § 2; Laws 1993, LB 81, § 3; Laws 1993, LB 121, § 87; Laws 1994, LB 979, § 2; Laws 1999, LB 396, § 7; Laws 2006, LB 876, § 8. |
A violation of this section does not nullify a bank loan which exceeds the statutory limit; status as a loan in excess of a statutory limit is not a defense for a debtor or the debtor's guarantor in an action by a bank to recover the statutorily excessive loan. Schuyler State Bank v. Cech, 228 Neb. 588, 423 N.W.2d 464 (1988).Language of this section including partnership within its purview contrasted with section 8-140 before 1931 amendment. State v. Pielsticker, 118 Neb. 419, 225 N.W. 51 (1929).Excessive borrower cannot avail himself of this section to defeat collection of his debt. Bank of College View v. Nelson, 106 Neb. 129, 183 N.W. 100 (1921).
8-142
Loans; excessive amount; violations; penalty.Any officer or employee of any bank who shall violate or knowingly permit a violation of the provisions of section 8-141, shall be guilty of a Class IV misdemeanor.
| Source | Laws 1909, c. 10, § 33, p. 82; R.S.1913, § 312; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVI, § 33, p. 698; Laws 1921, c. 313, § 1, p. 1002; C.S.1922, § 8013; Laws 1923, c. 191, § 45, p. 461; C.S.1929, § 8-150; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 33, p. 152; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-150; Laws 1943, c. 9, § 1(2), p. 68; R.S.1943, § 8-151; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 42, p. 152; Laws 1977, LB 40, § 47. |
8-143
Loans; excessive amount; violations; forfeiture of charter; directors' personal liability.If the directors of any bank shall knowingly violate or knowingly permit any of the officers, agents, or servants of the bank to violate any of the provisions of section 8-141, all rights, privileges, and franchises of the bank shall be thereby forfeited. Before such charter shall be declared forfeited, such violation shall be determined and adjudged by a court of competent jurisdiction in a suit brought for that purpose by the director in his own name. In case of such violation, every director who participated in or knowingly assented to the same shall be held liable in his personal and individual capacity for all damages which the bank, its shareholders, or any other person shall have sustained in consequence of such violation.
| Source | Laws 1923, c. 191, § 45, p. 461; C.S.1929, § 8-150; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 33, p. 152; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-150; Laws 1943, c. 9, § 1(3), p. 68; R.S.1943, § 8-152; Laws 1959, c. 15, § 15, p. 138; R.R.S.1943, § 8-152; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 43, p. 152. |
To state a cause of action under this section against bank directors, a plaintiff must factually allege that (1) the loan exceeds the limit imposed by section 8-141; (2) the directors participated in or knowingly assented to the violation of section 8-141; (3) the plaintiff is a person entitled to relief under this section; and (4) the plaintiff has sustained damages as the result of the excessive loan. Schuyler State Bank v. Cech, 228 Neb. 588, 423 N.W.2d 464 (1988).That part of this section imposing personal liability upon bank directors for damages sustained as the result of knowingly making excessive loans is remedial in character, and a cause of action therefor is complete the moment the excessive loan is made. Department of Banking v. McMullen, 134 Neb. 338, 278 N.W. 551 (1938).This section bearing penalty contrasted with section 8-147. State ex rel. Davis v. Farmers State Bank of Winside, 112 Neb. 597, 200 N.W. 173 (1924).
8-143.01
Extension of credit; limits; written report; credit report; violation; penalty; powers of director.(1) No bank shall extend credit to any of its executive officers, directors, or principal shareholders or to any related interest of such persons in an amount that, when aggregated with the amount of all other extensions of credit by the bank to that person and to all related interests of that person, exceeds the higher of twenty-five thousand dollars or five percent of the bank's unimpaired capital and unimpaired surplus unless (a) the extension of credit has been approved in advance by a majority vote of the entire board of directors of the bank, a record of which shall be made and kept as a part of the records of such bank, and (b) the interested party has abstained from participating directly or indirectly in such vote.
(2) No bank shall extend credit to any of its executive officers, directors, or principal shareholders or to any related interest of such persons in an amount that, when aggregated with the amount of all other extensions of credit by the bank to that person and to all related interests of that person, exceeds five hundred thousand dollars except by complying with the requirements of subdivisions (1)(a) and (b) of this section.
(3) No bank shall extend credit to any of its executive officers, and no such executive officer shall borrow from or otherwise become indebted to his or her bank, except in the amounts and for the purposes set forth in subsection (4) of this section.
(4) A bank shall be authorized to extend credit to any of its executive officers:
(a) In any amount to finance the education of such executive officer's children;
(b)(i) In any amount to finance or refinance the purchase, construction, maintenance, or improvement of a residence of such executive officer if the extension of credit is secured by a first lien on the residence and the residence is owned or is expected to be owned after the extension of credit by the executive officer and (ii) in the case of a refinancing, only the amount of the refinancing used to repay the original extension of credit, together with the closing costs of the refinancing, and any additional amount thereof used for any of the purposes enumerated in this subdivision are included within this category of credit;
(c) In any amount if the extension of credit is (i) secured by a perfected security interest in bonds, notes, certificates of indebtedness, or Treasury Bills of the United States or in other such obligations fully guaranteed as to principal and interest by the United States, (ii) secured by unconditional takeout commitments or guarantees of any department, agency, bureau, board, commission, or establishment of the United States or any corporation wholly owned directly or indirectly by the United States, or (iii) secured by a perfected security interest in a segregated deposit account in the lending bank; or
(d) For any other purpose not specified in subdivisions (a), (b), and (c) of this subsection if the aggregate amount of such other extensions of credit to such executive officer does not exceed, at any one time, the greater of two and one-half percent of the bank's unimpaired capital and unimpaired surplus or twenty-five thousand dollars, but in no event greater than one hundred thousand dollars or the amount of the bank's lending limit as prescribed in section 8-141, whichever is less.
(5)(a) Except as provided in subdivision (b) or (c) of this subsection, any executive officer shall make, on an annual basis, a written report to the board of directors of the bank of which he or she is an executive officer stating the date and amount of all loans or indebtedness on which he or she is a borrower, cosigner, or guarantor, the security therefor, and the purpose for which the proceeds have been or are to be used.
(b) Except as provided in subdivision (c) of this subsection, in lieu of the reports required by subdivision (a) of this subsection, the board of directors of a bank may obtain a credit report from a recognized credit agency, on an annual basis, for any or all of its executive officers.
(c) Subdivisions (a) and (b) of this subsection do not apply to any executive officer if such officer is excluded by a resolution of the board of directors or by the bylaws of the bank from participating in the major policymaking functions of the bank and does not actually participate in the major policymaking functions of the bank.
(6) No bank shall extend credit to any of its executive officers, directors, or principal shareholders or to any related interest of such persons in an amount that, when aggregated with the amount of all other extensions of credit by the bank to that person and to all related interests of that person, exceeds the lending limit of the bank as prescribed in section 8-141.
(7)(a) Except as provided in subdivision (b) of this subsection, no bank shall extend credit to any of its executive officers, directors, or principal shareholders or to any related interest of such persons unless the extension of credit (i) is made on substantially the same terms, including interest rates and collateral, as, and following credit-underwriting procedures that are not less stringent than, those prevailing at the time for comparable transactions by the bank with other persons that are not covered by this section and who are not employed by the bank and (ii) does not involve more than the normal risk of repayment or present other unfavorable features.
(b) Nothing in subdivision (a) of this subsection shall prohibit any extension of credit made by a bank pursuant to a benefit or compensation program under the provisions of 12 C.F.R. 215.4(a)(2).
(8) For purposes of this section:
(a) Executive officer shall mean a person who participates or has authority to participate, other than in the capacity of director, in the major policymaking functions of the bank, whether or not the officer has an official title, the title designates such officer as an assistant, or such officer is serving without salary or other compensation. Executive officer shall include the chairperson of the board of directors, the president, all vice presidents, the cashier, the corporate secretary, and the treasurer, unless the executive officer is excluded by a resolution of the board of directors or by the bylaws of the bank from participating, other than in the capacity of director, in the major policymaking functions of the bank, and the executive officer does not actually participate in such functions. A manager or assistant manager of a branch of a bank shall not be considered to be an executive officer unless such individual participates or is authorized to participate in the major policymaking functions of the bank; and
(b) Unimpaired capital and unimpaired surplus shall mean the sum of:
(i) The total equity capital of the bank reported on its most recent consolidated report of condition filed under section 8-166;
(ii) Any subordinated notes and debentures approved as an addition to the bank's capital structure by the appropriate federal banking agency; and
(iii) Any valuation reserves created by charges to the bank's income reported on its most recent consolidated report of condition filed under section 8-166.
(9) Any executive officer, director, or principal shareholder of a bank or any other person who intentionally violates this section or who aids, abets, or assists in a violation of this section shall be guilty of a Class IV felony.
(10) The Director of Banking and Finance shall have authority to adopt and promulgate rules and regulations to implement this section, including rules or regulations defining or further defining terms used in this section, consistent with the provisions of 12 U.S.C. 84 and implementing Regulation O.
| Source | Laws 1994, LB 611, § 2; Laws 1997, LB 137, § 4; Laws 1999, LB 396, § 8; Laws 2001, LB 53, § 1; Laws 2005, LB 533, § 7; Laws 2008, LB851, § 5. March 20, 2008 |
8-144
Loans or extension of credit; improper; willful and knowing violation; liability.Any officer or employee of any bank who shall willfully and knowingly violate any of the provisions of sections 8-141 to 8-143.01 shall be liable under his or her bond for any loss to the bank resulting therefrom.
| Source | Laws 1909, c. 10, § 40, p. 86; R.S.1913, § 319; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVI, § 40, p. 701; C.S.1922, § 8020; C.S.1929, § 8-159; R.S.1943, § 8-153; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 44, p. 152; Laws 1994, LB 611, § 3. |
8-145
Loans; other improper solicitation or receipt of benefits; unlawful inducement; penalty.Any stockholder or director, officer, agent, or employee of any bank who, for the use or benefit of himself or any other person than such bank, solicits or asks for or receives or agrees to receive from any person, any gift or compensation or reward or inducement of any kind for (1) procuring or endeavoring to procure any loan from such bank to any person, or (2) procuring or endeavoring to procure the purchase by such bank from any person of any negotiable or nonnegotiable instrument of any kind by discount or otherwise, or (3) procuring or endeavoring to procure the purchase by such bank from any person of any real or personal property of any kind, or (4) procuring or endeavoring to procure such bank to permit any person to overdraw his account with such bank, shall be guilty of a Class I misdemeanor.
| Source | Laws 1923, c. 191, § 40, p. 458; C.S.1929, § 8-151; R.S.1943, § 8-154; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 45, p. 152; Laws 1977, LB 40, § 48. |
8-146
Repealed. Laws 1972, LB 1358,§1.
8-147
Direct borrowing of bank; loans and investments; limitation on amounts; illegal transfer of assets; violation; penalty.(1) The aggregate amount of direct borrowing of any bank shall at no time exceed the amount of its paid-up capital, surplus, undivided profits, capital reserves, capital notes, and debentures, except with the prior written permission of the director. Direct borrowing shall not include:
(a) Money borrowed on the bank's bills payable secured by (i) direct or indirect obligations of the United States Government or (ii) obligations guaranteed by agencies of the United States Government;
(b) Rediscounts, bills payable, borrowings, or other liabilities with or to the federal reserve system or the federal reserve banks, if the bank is a member of the federal reserve system;
(c) Rediscounts, bills payable, borrowings, or other liabilities with or to the Federal Home Loan Bank System or the Federal Home Loan Banks, if the bank is a member of the Federal Home Loan Bank System; or
(d) Rediscounts, bills payable, borrowings, or other liabilities with or to the federal intermediate credit banks.
(2) The aggregate amount of the loans and investments of any bank shall at no time exceed fifteen times the amount of its paid-up capital, surplus, undivided profits, capital reserves, capital notes, and debentures. For purposes of this section, loans and investments shall not include a bank's (a) cash reserves, (b) real estate and buildings at which the bank is authorized to conduct its business, (c) furniture and fixtures, and (d) obligations set forth in subdivisions (1)(a), (b), and (c) of this section.
(3) Any bank becoming a member of the federal reserve system or the Federal Home Loan Bank System shall have the same privileges to the same extent as national banks.
(4) With the prior written permission of the director, a bank may rediscount paper in an amount in excess of its paid-up capital stock.
(5) Any transfer of assets of a bank in violation of this section shall be void as against the creditors of the bank.
(6) Any officer, director, or employee of a bank who does, or permits to be done, any act in violation of this section and any other person who knowingly assists in the violation of this section shall be guilty of a Class IV felony.
| Source | Laws 1909, c. 10, § 24, p. 78; R.S.1913, § 303; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVI, § 24, p. 695; Laws 1922, Spec. Sess., c. 6, § 1, p. 66; C.S.1922, § 8005; Laws 1923, c. 190, § 1, p. 435; C.S.1929, § 8-136; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 25, p. 147; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-136; R.S.1943, § 8-138; Laws 1945, c. 8, § 1, p. 105; Laws 1959, c. 15, § 11, p. 136; R.R.S.1943, § 8-138; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 47, p. 153; Laws 1969, c. 36, § 1, p. 243; Laws 1973, LB 143, § 1; Laws 1977, LB 40, § 49; Laws 1982, LB 779, § 1; Laws 1983, LB 177, § 1; Laws 1994, LB 979, § 3; Laws 1996, LB 1053, § 5; Laws 1997, LB 2, § 1. |
Query made by court as to whether borrowing of money upon behalf of bank through execution of individual obligations of directors to third parties was a transaction in violation of this section. State ex rel. Sorensen v. Farmers State Bank of Wood River, 127 Neb. 139, 254 N.W. 728 (1934).Bank may rediscount note and mortgage beyond the limits provided in this section by permission of the banking department. Luikart v. Hunt, 124 Neb. 642, 247 N.W. 790 (1933).Execution by bank officer of bills payable in behalf of bank in excess of the amount of its capital stock and surplus justified conviction under this section. Hinds v. State, 121 Neb. 508, 237 N.W. 617 (1931).Prior to amendment of this section in 1923, in absence of provision for penalty, loan to bank made in violation of this section was not void, and where contract was completely executed by lending of money and execution and delivery of notes therefor, borrowing bank could not refuse payment of notes. State ex rel. Davis v. Farmers State Bank of Winside, 112 Neb. 597, 200 N.W. 173 (1924).
8-148
Banks; own capital stock; loans on, purchase, or use as collateral by bank prohibited; exceptions.(1) Except as provided in subsection (2) or (3) of this section, a bank shall not make any loan or discount on the security of the shares of its own capital stock or the capital stock of its holding company, if any, be the purchaser or holder of any such shares, or purchase any securities convertible into stock or, except as provided in this section and sections 8-148.01, 8-148.02, 8-148.04, 8-148.06, 8-149, and 21-2109, the shares of any corporation, unless such security or purchase is necessary to prevent loss upon a debt previously contracted in good faith. Such stock so purchased or acquired shall, within six months after the time of its purchase unless written approval of a longer holding period is obtained from the director, be sold or disposed of at public or private sale, or in default thereof, a receiver may be appointed to close up the business of the bank, except that such stock, if shares of another bank or a bank holding company, shall be sold or disposed of as required by the director. In no case shall the amount of stock so held at any one time exceed ten percent of the paid-up capital of such bank.
(2) Any bank may subscribe to, invest, purchase, and own shares of investment companies registered under the Investment Company Act of 1940 when the investment companies' assets consist of and are limited to obligations that are eligible for investment by the bank. The department may adopt and promulgate rules and regulations governing the amounts, terms, and conditions of such subscriptions, investments, purchases, and ownership.
(3) Any bank may subscribe to, invest, purchase, and own Student Loan Marketing Association stock, Government National Mortgage Association stock, Federal National Mortgage Association stock, Federal Agricultural Mortgage Corporation stock, Federal Home Loan Mortgage Corporation stock, or stock issued by any authorized agency of the United States Government, including any corporation or enterprise wholly owned directly or indirectly by the United States, or with the authority to borrow directly from the United States treasury, which the department has approved by rule and regulation or order. The department may further adopt and promulgate rules and regulations governing the amounts, terms, and conditions of such subscriptions, investments, purchases, and ownerships, except that a bank shall not obligate more than five percent of its capital, surplus, undivided profits, and unencumbered reserves for such stock.
| Source | Laws 1909, c. 10, § 25, p. 78; R.S.1913, § 304; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVI, § 25, p. 695; C.S.1922, § 8006; C.S.1929, § 8-137; R.S.1943, § 8-139; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 48, p. 154; Laws 1973, LB 164, § 14; Laws 1985, LB 165, § 1; Laws 1987, LB 532, § 1; Laws 1987, LB 453, § 2; Laws 1987, LB 237, § 1; Laws 1988, LB 996, § 2; Laws 1993, LB 81, § 4; Laws 2003, LB 217, § 6; Laws 2005, LB 533, § 8. |
Except to prevent loss upon a debt previously contracted in good faith, a state bank is without power, directly or through agent, to buy or hold capital stock of another bank. Cooper v. Bane, 110 Neb. 83, 196 N.W. 119 (1923).
8-148.01
Corporation operating a computer center; investment of funds; limitation.Any bank may invest not more than ten percent of its capital and surplus either in stock of a corporation operating a computer center or directly, alone or with others, in a computer center. With written approval of the Director of Banking and Finance, such additional percentage of its capital and surplus may be so invested as the director shall approve. Such investment shall not be subject to the provisions of sections 8-148, 8-149, and 8-150.
| Source | Laws 1967, c. 18, § 1, p. 116; Laws 1993, LB 81, § 5. |
8-148.02
Banks; subscribe, invest, buy, and own stock; agricultural credit corporation; livestock loan company; limitation.Any bank may subscribe to, invest, buy, and own stock in any agricultural credit corporation or livestock loan company, or its affiliate, the principal business of which corporation must be the extension of short and intermediate term credit to farmers and ranchers, including partnerships, limited liability companies, and corporations engaged in farming and ranching, for agricultural purposes, including the breeding, raising, fattening, or marketing of livestock. Such bank shall not obligate more than thirty-five percent of its paid-up capital, surplus, undivided profits, capital reserves, capital notes, and debentures for such purposes, except that if such bank owns at least eighty percent of the voting stock of such agricultural credit corporation or livestock loan company, such limitation on the amount of obligation for such purposes shall not apply. Such subscription, investment, possession, or ownership shall not be subject to the provisions of sections 8-148, 8-149, and 8-150.
| Source | Laws 1969, c. 30, § 1, p. 235; Laws 1971, LB 720, § 1; Laws 1974, LB 845, § 1; Laws 1982, LB 779, § 2; Laws 1993, LB 121, § 88. |
8-148.03
Bonds of the State of Israel; securities; banks; savings and loan associations, insurance companies, credit unions; invest funds.Bonds of the State of Israel are hereby made securities in which banks, savings and loan associations, insurance companies, and credit unions may properly and legally invest funds.
| Source | Laws 1974, LB 845, § 3. |
8-148.04
Community development investments; conditions.(1) Any bank may make a community development investment or investments either directly or through purchasing an equity interest in or an evidence of indebtedness of an entity primarily engaged in making community development investments, if the following conditions are satisfied:
(a) An investment under this subsection does not expose the bank to unlimited liability; and
(b) The bank's aggregate investment under this subsection does not exceed fifteen percent of its capital and surplus. If the bank's investment in any one entity will exceed five percent of its capital and surplus, the prior written approval of the department must be obtained.
(2) Nothing in this section shall prevent a bank from charging off as a contribution an investment made pursuant to subsection (1) of this section.
(3) Such subscription, investment, possession, or ownership shall not be subject to sections 8-148, 8-149, and 8-150.
(4) For purposes of this section, community development investments means investments of a predominantly civic, community, or public nature and not merely private and entrepreneurial.
| Source | Laws 1993, LB 81, § 6; Laws 1994, LB 979, § 4; Laws 1996, LB 1184, § 1; Laws 2006, LB 876, § 9; Laws 2007, LB124, § 4. |
8-148.05
Qualified Canadian Government obligations; investment.(1) Any bank may deal in, underwrite, and purchase for its own account qualified Canadian Government obligations to the same extent that such bank may deal in, underwrite, and purchase for its own account obligations of the United States Government or general obligations of any state thereof.
(2) For purposes of this section:
(a) Qualified Canadian Government obligation shall mean any debt obligation which is backed by Canada or any Canadian province to a degree which is comparable to the liability of the United States Government or any state thereof for any obligation which is backed by the full faith and credit of the United States Government or any state thereof. Qualified Canadian Government obligations shall also include any debt obligation of any agent of Canada or any Canadian province if:
(i) The obligation of such agent is assumed in such agent's capacity as agent for Canada or any Canadian province; and
(ii) Canada or any Canadian province, on whose behalf such agent is acting with respect to such obligation, is ultimately and unconditionally liable for such obligation; and
(b) The term Canadian province shall mean a province of Canada and shall include the Yukon Territory and the Northwest Territories and their successors.
| Source | Laws 1993, LB 423, § 1. |
8-148.06
Banks; subscribe, invest, buy, own, and sell stock; bank subsidiary corporation; limitation.Any bank may subscribe to, invest in, buy, own, and sell the common stock, obligations, and other securities of one or more bank subsidiary corporations organized under the laws of the State of Nebraska. A bank shall not obligate more than thirty-five percent of its paid-up capital stock, surplus, undivided profits, capital reserves, and capital notes and debentures for such purposes. An additional percentage of its paid-up capital stock, surplus, undivided profits, capital reserves, and capital notes and debentures may be invested with written approval of the director. The subscription, investment, possession, or ownership is not subject to sections 8-148, 8-149, and 8-150.
| Source | Laws 1995, LB 384, § 2. |
8-148.07
Bank subsidiary corporation; authorized activities.A bank subsidiary corporation shall engage in only those activities prescribed under subdivision (1) of section 8-101 or that its bank shareholder is authorized to perform under the laws of this state and shall engage in those activities only at locations in this state where the bank shareholder could be authorized to perform activities.
| Source | Laws 1995, LB 384, § 3; Laws 2000, LB 932, § 2. |
8-148.08
Bank subsidiary corporation; examination and regulation.A bank subsidiary corporation is subject to examination and regulation by the department to the same extent as its bank shareholder.
| Source | Laws 1995, LB 384, § 4. |
8-149
Banks; investment in bank premises or holding corporations; loans upon security of stock of holding corporation; written approval of Director of Banking and Finance required; when.(1) No bank shall, without the written approval of the director, (a) invest in bank premises or in the stock, bonds, debentures, or other such obligations of any corporation holding the premises of such bank, or (b) make loans to or upon the security of the stock of any such corporation, if the aggregate of all such investments and loans will exceed the paid-up capital stock, surplus, and capital notes and debentures of such bank. Stock held as authorized by this section shall not be subject to the provisions of section 8-148.
(2) Investments by a bank in bank premises necessary for the transaction of its business shall include, but not be limited to:
(a) Premises that are owned and occupied, or to be occupied if under construction, by the bank, its branches, or its consolidated subsidiaries;
(b) Real estate acquired and intended, in good faith, for use in future expansions;
(c) Parking facilities that are used by customers or employees of the bank, its branches, or its consolidated subsidiaries;
(d) Residential property for the use of officers or employees of the bank, its branches, or its consolidated subsidiaries who are:
(i) Located in areas where suitable housing at a reasonable price is not readily available; or
(ii) Temporarily assigned to a foreign country, including foreign nationals temporarily assigned to the United States; and
(e) Property for the use of officers, employees, or customers of the bank, its branches, and its consolidated subsidiaries or for the temporary lodging of such persons in areas where suitable commercial lodging is not readily available, if the purchase and operation of the property qualifies as a deductible business expense for federal tax purposes.
| Source | Laws 1963, c. 29, § 49, p. 155; Laws 1973, LB 164, § 15; Laws 1997, LB 137, § 5; Laws 2007, LB124, § 5. |
8-150
Banks; real estate; power to acquire and convey; limitations and conditions.Any bank may purchase, hold, and convey real estate for the following purposes: (1) Such as is authorized by section 8-149; (2) such as shall be conveyed to it for debts due the bank; and (3) such as it shall purchase at sale under judgments, decrees, deeds of trust, or mortgages held by the bank or shall purchase to secure debts due to it upon its securities, but the bank at such sale shall not bid a larger amount than required to satisfy such judgments or decrees with costs. Real estate acquired in satisfaction of debts or at a sale upon judgments, decrees, deeds of trust, or mortgages shall be sold at private or public sale within five years unless authority shall be given in writing by the department to hold it for a longer period. The total amount of real estate held by any bank for purposes of subdivisions (2) and (3) of this section shall not be entered on the records of the bank as an asset at a value greater than (a) the unpaid balance of the debts due the bank plus its out-of-pocket expenses incurred in acquiring clear title, (b) its judgments or decrees with costs, or (c) the appraised value of such real estate, whichever is less, except that a bank may expend funds as necessary for repairs or to complete a project in order to market such property. A bank may utilize property acquired by it under subdivisions (2) and (3) of this section in any manner authorized by the department.
| Source | Laws 1909, c. 10, § 29, p. 80; R.S.1913, § 308; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVI, § 29, p. 697; C.S.1922, § 8009-a; Laws 1925, c. 30, § 10, p. 128; C.S.1929, § 8-145; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 29, p. 149; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-145; R.S.1943, § 8-145; Laws 1959, c. 15, § 13, p. 137; R.R.S.1943, § 8-145; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 50, p. 155; Laws 1985, LB 653, § 5. |
8-151
Banks; book value of property; increases; written approval required.No bank shall increase the book value of its existing real estate, furniture, or fixtures without first notifying the department of its intention so to do and obtaining a written approval therefor.
| Source | Laws 1923, c. 191, § 47, p. 462; C.S.1929, § 8-146; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 30, p. 150; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-146; R.S.1943, § 8-146; Laws 1961, c. 15, § 5, p. 112; R.R.S.1943, § 8-146; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 51, p. 155. |
8-152
Banks; loans on real estate; authorized.A bank may make loans secured by real estate or may participate with other institutions in such loans whether such participation occurs at the inception of the loan or at any time thereafter.
| Source | Laws 1963, c. 29, § 52, p. 156; Laws 1965, c. 28, § 4, p. 202; Laws 1972, LB 1226, § 1; Laws 1973, LB 164, § 16; Laws 1974, LB 845, § 2; Laws 1979, LB 220, § 6; Laws 1982, LB 779, § 3; Laws 1994, LB 979, § 5; |
8-153
Checks; preprinted information; cleared at par; exception.All checks, unless sent to banks as special collection items, shall have preprinted the magnetically encoded routing and transit symbol of the bank and either the name of the maker or the magnetically encoded account number of the maker. Except for checks sent to banks as special collection items, all checks drawn on any bank organized under the laws of this state shall be cleared at par by the bank on which they are drawn.
| Source | Laws 1945, c. 11, § 1, p. 110; R.R.S.1943, § 8-163.01; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 53, p. 157; Laws 1979, LB 269, § 1. |
Special collection items are those which in fact actually require the employment of unusual and individual treatment. Placek v. Edstrom, 151 Neb. 225, 37 N.W.2d 203 (1949).Act sustained as constitutional. Placek v. Edstrom, 148 Neb. 79, 26 N.W.2d 489 (1947).
8-154
Repealed. Laws 1981, LB 199,§1.
8-155
Forged, altered, or raised checks; payment on; liability of bank to depositor; when.No bank which has paid and charged to the account of a depositor any money on a forged, altered, or raised check issued in the name of such depositor shall be liable to such depositor or his legal representative for the amount paid thereon, unless such depositor or his legal representative shall notify the bank that the check so paid is forged, altered, or raised either (1) within one year after notice to such depositor that the vouchers representing payments charged to the account of such depositor for the period during which such payment was made are ready for delivery, or (2) in case no such notice has been given within one year after the return to such depositor or his legal representative of the voucher representing such payment.
| Source | Laws 1919, c. 18, § 1, p. 83; C.S.1922, § 8050; C.S.1929, § 8-167; R.S.1943, § 8-170; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 55, p. 157. |
8-156
Forged, altered, or raised checks; payment on; notice; registered or certified mail.The notice referred to in section 8-155 may be given by either registered or certified mail addressed to such depositor or his legal representative at his last-known address with postage prepaid.
| Source | Laws 1919, c. 18, § 2, p. 83; C.S.1922, § 8051; C.S.1929, § 8-168; R.S.1943, § 8-171; Laws 1957, c. 242, § 3, p. 818; R.R.S.1943, § 8-171; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 56, p. 158. |
8-157
Branch banking; Director of Banking and Finance; powers.(1) Except as otherwise provided in this section and section 8-2104, the general business of every bank shall be transacted at the place of business specified in its charter.
(2)(a)(i) Except as provided in subdivision (2)(a)(ii) of this section, with the approval of the director, any bank located in this state may establish and maintain in this state an unlimited number of branches at which all banking transactions allowed by law may be made.
(ii) Any bank that owns or controls more than twenty-two percent of the total deposits in Nebraska, as described in subdivision (2)(c) of section 8-910 and computed in accordance with subsection (3) of section 8-910, or any bank that is a subsidiary of a bank holding company that owns or controls more than twenty-two percent of the total deposits in Nebraska, as described in subdivision (2)(c) of section 8-910 and computed in accordance with subsection (3) of section 8-910, shall not establish and maintain an unlimited number of branches as provided in subdivision (2)(a)(i) of this section. With the approval of the director, a bank as described in this subdivision may establish and maintain in the county in which such bank is located an unlimited number of branches at which all banking transactions allowed by law may be made, except that if such bank is located in a Class I or Class III county, such bank may establish and maintain in Class I and Class III counties an unlimited number of branches at which all banking transactions allowed by law may be made.
(iii) Any bank which establishes and maintains branches pursuant to subdivision (2)(a)(i) of this section and which subsequently becomes a bank as described in subdivision (2)(a)(ii) of this section shall not be subject to the limitations as to location of branches contained in subdivision (2)(a)(ii) of this section with regard to any such established branch and shall continue to be entitled to maintain any such established branch as if such bank had not become a bank as described in subdivision (2)(a)(ii) of this section.
(b) With the approval of the director, any bank or any branch may establish and maintain a mobile branch at which all banking transactions allowed by law may be made. Such mobile branch may consist of one or more vehicles which may transact business only within the county in which such bank or such branch is located and within counties in this state which adjoin such county.
(c) For purposes of this subsection:
(i) Class I county means a county in this state with a population of three hundred thousand or more as determined by the most recent federal decennial census;
(ii) Class II county means a county in this state with a population of at least two hundred thousand and less than three hundred thousand as determined by the most recent federal decennial census;
(iii) Class III county means a county in this state with a population of at least one hundred thousand and less than two hundred thousand as determined by the most recent federal decennial census; and
(iv) Class IV county means a county in this state with a population of less than one hundred thousand as determined by the most recent federal decennial census.
(3) With the approval of the director, a bank may establish and maintain branches acquired pursuant to section 8-1506 or 8-1516. All banking transactions allowed by law may be made at such branches.
(4) With the approval of the director, a bank may acquire the assets and assume the deposits of a branch of another financial institution in Nebraska if the acquired branch is converted to a branch of the acquiring bank. All banking transactions allowed by law may be made at a branch acquired pursuant to this subsection.
(5) With the approval of the director, a bank may establish a branch pursuant to subdivision (6) of section 8-115.01. All banking transactions allowed by law may be made at such branch.
(6) The name given to any branch established and maintained pursuant to this section shall not be substantially similar to the name of any existing bank or branch which is unaffiliated with the newly created branch and is located in the same city, village, or county. The name of such newly created branch shall be approved by the director.
(7) A bank which has a main chartered office or an approved branch located in the State of Nebraska may, through any of its executive officers, including executive officers licensed as such pursuant to section 8-139, or designated agents, conduct a loan closing at a location other than the place of business specified in the bank's charter or any branch thereof.
(8) A bank which has a main chartered office or approved branch located in the State of Nebraska may, upon notification to the department, establish savings account programs at any elementary or secondary school, whether public or private, that has students who reside in the same city or village as the main chartered office or branch of the bank, or, if the main office of the bank is located in an unincorporated area of a county, at any school that has students who reside in the same unincorporated area. The savings account programs shall be limited to the establishment of individual student accounts and the receipt of deposits for such accounts.
(9) Upon receiving an application for a branch to be established pursuant to subdivision (2)(a) of this section, to establish a mobile branch pursuant to subdivision (2)(b) of this section, to acquire a branch of another financial institution pursuant to subsection (4) of this section, or to move the location of an established branch other than a move made pursuant to subdivision (6) of section 8-115.01, the director shall hold a public hearing on the matter if he or she determines, in his or her discretion, that the condition of the applicant bank warrants a hearing. If the director determines that the condition of the bank does not warrant a hearing, the director shall (a) publish a notice of the filing of the application in a newspaper of general circulation in the county where the proposed branch or mobile branch would be located, the expense of which shall be paid by the applicant bank, and (b) give notice of such application to all financial institutions located within the county where the proposed branch or mobile branch would be located and to such other interested parties as the director may determine. The director shall send the notice to financial institutions by first-class mail, postage prepaid, or electronic mail. Electronic mail may be used if the financial institution agrees in advance to receive such notices by electronic mail. If the director receives any substantive objection to the proposed branch or mobile branch within fifteen days after publication of such notice, he or she shall hold a hearing on the application. Notice of a hearing held pursuant to this subsection shall be published for two consecutive weeks in a newspaper of general circulation in the county where the proposed branch or mobile branch would be located. The date for hearing the application shall not be more than ninety days after the filing of the application and not less than thirty days after the last publication of notice of hearing. The expense of any publication and mailing required by this section shall be paid by the applicant.
| Source | Laws 1927, c. 33, § 1, p. 153; C.S.1929, § 8-1,118; R.S.1943, § 8-1,105; Laws 1959, c. 17, § 1, p. 141; R.R.S.1943, § 8-1,105; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 57, p. 158; Laws 1973, LB 312, § 1; Laws 1975, LB 269, § 2; Laws 1977, LB 77, § 1; Laws 1983, LB 58, § 1; Laws 1983, LB 252, § 4; Laws 1984, LB 1026, § 1; Laws 1985, LB 295, § 1; Laws 1985, LB 625, § 1; Laws 1986, LB 983, § 3; Laws 1987, LB 615, § 2; Laws 1988, LB 703, § 1; Laws 1989, LB 272, § 1; Laws 1990, LB 956, § 4; Laws 1991, LB 190, § 1; Laws 1991, LB 782, § 1; Laws 1992, LB 470, § 1; Laws 1992, LB 757, § 3; Laws 1993, LB 81, § 7; Laws 1995, LB 456, § 1; Laws 1995, LB 599, § 2; Laws 1996, LB 1275, § 3; Laws 1997, LB 56, § 1; Laws 1997, LB 136, § 1; Laws 1997, LB 137, § 6; Laws 1997, LB 351, § 9; Laws 2002, LB 957, § 4; Laws 2002, LB 1089, § 2; Laws 2002, LB 1094, § 5; Laws 2003, LB 217, § 7; Laws 2005, LB 533, § 9; Laws 2008, LB851, § 6. March 20, 2008 |
Subsection (3) of this section does not indicate that the approval of the director of the Department of Banking and Finance absolves a bank from any obligations it may owe to the minority shareholders, that the director is required to disapprove a merger that is unfair to the minority shareholders, or that the director is empowered to require a bank to pay the fair value of a dissenter's shares. Stoneman v. United Neb. Bank, 254 Neb. 477, 577 N.W.2d 271 (1998).Detached facility approximately one block from bank, providing drive-in and walk-in teller stations offering most banking services, is a branch bank. Nebraskans for Independent Banking, Inc. v. Omaha Nat. Bank, 530 F.2d 755 (8th Cir. 1976). (Opinion vacated and cause remanded to district court for further proceedings in light of Supreme Court per curiam opinion, 426 U.S. 310, dated June 7, 1976.)Federal district court would not abstain from deciding whether state banking statute was properly adopted by Nebraska Legislature where analysis of the applicable Nebraska case law left no doubt that such statute was invalid. Nebraskans for Independent Banking, Inc. v. Omaha Nat. Bank, 423 F.Supp. 519 (D. Neb. 1976).Branch banking is illegal in Nebraska. Farris v. Indian Hills Nat. Bank, 244 F.Supp. 594 (D. Neb. 1964).
8-157.01
Financial institution;
electronic terminals; use; user financial institution.(1)
Any financial institution which has a main chartered office or approved branch
located in the State of Nebraska may establish and maintain any number of
automatic teller machines at which all banking transactions, defined as receiving
deposits of every kind and nature and crediting such to customer accounts,
cashing checks and cash withdrawals, transfer of funds from checking accounts
to savings accounts, transfer of funds from savings accounts to checking accounts,
transfer of funds from either checking accounts and savings accounts to accounts
of other customers, payment transfers from customer accounts into accounts
maintained by other customers of the financial institution or the financial
institution, including preauthorized draft authority, preauthorized loans,
and credit transactions, receiving payments payable at the financial institution
or otherwise, and account balance inquiry, may be conducted. Any other transaction
incidental to the business of the financial institution or which will provide
a benefit to the financial institution's customers or the general public may
be conducted at an automatic teller machine upon thirty days' prior written
notice to the director if the director does not object to the proposed other
transaction within the thirty-day notice period. Neither such automatic teller
machines nor the transactions conducted thereat shall be construed as the
establishment of a branch or as branch banking. Such automatic teller machines
shall be made available on a nondiscriminating basis for use by customers
of any financial institution which has a main chartered office or approved
branch located in the State of Nebraska which becomes a user financial institution.
It shall not be deemed discrimination if an automatic teller machine does
not offer the same transaction services as other automatic teller machines
or if there are no fees charged between affiliate financial institutions for
the use of automatic teller machines.
(2) Any financial institution may become a user financial institution
by agreeing to pay the establishing financial institution its automatic teller
machine usage fee. Such agreement shall be implied by the use of such automatic
teller machines. Nothing in this subsection shall prohibit a user financial
institution from agreeing to responsibilities and benefits which might be
contained in a standardized agreement. The establishing financial institution
or its designated data processing center shall be responsible for transmitting
transactions originating from its automatic teller machine to a switch, but
nothing contained in this section shall be construed to require routing of
all transactions to a switch. All automatic teller machines must be made available
on a nondiscriminating basis, for use by customers of any financial institution
which has a main chartered office or approved branch located in the State
of Nebraska which becomes a user financial institution, through methods, fees,
and processes that the establishing financial institution has provided for
switching transactions. The director, upon notice and after a hearing, may
terminate or suspend the use of any automatic teller machine if he or she
determines that it is not available on a nondiscriminating basis for use by
customers of any financial institution which has a main chartered office or
approved branch located in the State of Nebraska which becomes a user financial
institution or that transactions originated by customers of user financial
institutions are not being routed to a switch or other data processing centers.
Nothing in this section may be construed to prohibit nonbank employees from
assisting in transactions originated at the automatic teller machines, and
such assistance shall not be deemed to be engaging in the business of banking.
Such nonbank employees may be trained in the use of the automatic teller machines
by financial institution employees.
(3) An establishing financial institution shall not be deemed
to make an automatic teller machine available on a nondiscriminating basis
if, through personnel services offered, advertising on or off the automatic
teller machine's premises, or otherwise, it discriminates in the use of the
automatic teller machine against any user financial institution which has
a main chartered office or approved branch located in the State of Nebraska.
(4)(a) Any consumer initiating an electronic funds transfer
at an automatic teller machine for which an automatic teller machine surcharge
will be imposed shall receive notice in accordance with the provisions of
15 U.S.C. 1693b(d)(3)(A) and (B), as such section existed on January 1, 2004.
Such notice shall (i) be posted in a prominent and conspicuous location on
or at the automatic teller machine at which the electronic funds transfer
is initiated by the consumer and (ii) appear on the screen of the automatic
teller machine or appear on a paper notice issued from such machine after
the transaction is initiated and before the consumer is irrevocably committed
to completing the transaction.
(b) Subdivision (a)(ii) of this subsection shall not apply
until January 1, 2005, to any automatic teller machine that lacks the technical
capability to disclose the notice on the screen or to issue a paper notice
after the transaction is initiated and before the consumer is irrevocably
committed to completing the transaction.
(5) A point-of-sale terminal may be established at any point
within this state. A financial institution may contract with a seller of goods
and services or any other third party for the operation of point-of-sale terminals.
A point-of-sale terminal shall be made available on a nondiscriminating basis
for use by customers of any financial institution which has a main chartered
office or approved branch located in the State of Nebraska which becomes a
user financial institution. Nothing in this subsection shall prohibit payment
of fees to a financial institution which issues an access device used to initiate
electronic funds transfer transactions at a point-of-sale terminal.
(6) A seller of goods and services or any other third party
on whose premises one or more point-of-sale terminals are established shall
not be, solely by virtue of such establishment, a financial institution and
shall not be subject to the laws governing, or other requirements imposed
on, financial institutions, except for the requirement that it faithfully
perform its obligations in connection with any transaction originated at any
point-of-sale terminal on its premises. The acquiring financial institution
shall be responsible for compliance with all applicable standards, rules,
and regulations governing point-of-sale transactions.
(7) Any financial institution, upon a request of the director,
shall file with the director a current listing of all point-of-sale terminals
established by the financial institution within this state. For purposes of
this subsection, point-of-sale terminal shall include a group of one or more
of such terminals established at a single business location. Such listing
shall contain any reasonable descriptive information pertaining to the point-of-sale
terminal as required by the director. Neither the establishment of such point-of-sale
terminal nor any transactions conducted thereat shall be construed as the
establishment of a branch or as branch banking. Following establishment of
a point-of-sale terminal, the director, upon notice and after a hearing, may
terminate or suspend the use of such point-of-sale terminal if he or she determines
that it is not made available on a nondiscriminating basis for use by customers
of any financial institution which has a main chartered office or approved
branch located in the State of Nebraska which becomes a user financial institution,
that the necessary information is not on file with the director, or that transactions
originated by customers of user financial institutions are not being routed
to a switch or other data processing center. Nothing in this section shall
be construed to prohibit nonbank employees from assisting in transactions
originated at the point-of-sale terminals, and such assistance shall not be
deemed to be engaging in the business of banking.
(8) Transactions at point-of-sale terminals may include:
(a) Check guarantees;
(b) Account balance inquiries;
(c) Transfers of funds from a customer's account for payment
to a seller's account for goods and services on whose premises the point-of-sale
terminal is located in payment for the goods and services;
(d) Cash withdrawals by a customer from the customer's account
or accounts;
(e) Transfers between accounts of the same customers at the
same financial institution; and
(f) Such other transactions as the director, upon application,
notice, and hearing, may approve.
(9)(a) Automatic teller machines may be established and maintained
by a financial institution which has a main chartered office or approved branch
located in the State of Nebraska, by a group of two or more of such financial
institutions, or by a combination of such financial institution or financial
institutions and a third party.
(b) Point-of-sale terminals may be established and maintained
by a financial institution which has a main chartered office or approved branch
located in the State of Nebraska, by a group of two or more of such financial
institutions, or by a combination of such financial institutions and a third
party. No one, through personnel services offered, advertising on or off the
point-of-sale terminal premises, or otherwise, may discriminate in the use
of the point-of-sale terminal against any other user financial institution.
(10) All financial institutions shall be given an equal opportunity
for the use of and access to a switch, and no discrimination shall exist or
preferential treatment be given in either the operation of such switch or
the charges for use thereof. The operation of such switch shall be with the
approval of the director. Approval of such switch shall be given by the director
when he or she determines that its design and operation are such as to provide
access thereto and use thereof by any financial institution without discrimination
as to access or cost of its use. Any switch established in Nebraska and approved
by the director prior to January 1, 1993, shall be deemed to be approved for
purposes of this section.
(11) Use of an automatic teller machine or a point-of-sale
terminal through access to a switch and use of any switch shall be made available
on a nondiscriminating basis to any financial institution. A financial institution
shall only be permitted use of the switch if the financial institution conforms
to reasonable technical operating standards which have been established by
the switch.
(12) To assure maximum safety and security against malfunction,
fraud, theft, and other accidents or abuses and to assure that all such access
devices will have the capability of activating all automatic teller machines
and point-of-sale terminals established in this state, no automatic teller
machine or point-of-sale terminal shall accept an access device which does
not conform to such specifications as are generally accepted. No automatic
teller machine or point-of-sale terminal shall be established or operated
which does not accept an access device which conforms with such specifications.
An automatic teller machine shall bear a logo type or other
identification symbol designed to advise customers that the automatic teller
machine may be activated by any access device which complies with the generally
accepted specifications. A point-of-sale terminal shall either bear or the
premises on which the point-of-sale terminal is established shall contain
a visible logo type or other identification symbol designed to advise customers
that the point-of-sale terminal may be activated by any access device which
complies with the generally accepted specifications. An automatic teller machine
or point-of-sale terminal may also bear, at the option of the establishing
or acquiring financial institution, any of the following:
(a) The names of all individual financial institutions using
such automatic teller machines or point-of-sale terminals in alphabetical
order, except that the establishing or acquiring financial institution may
be listed first, and in a uniform typeface, size, and color; or
(b) The logo type or symbol of any association, corporation,
or other entity or organization formed by one or more of the financial institutions
using such automatic teller machines or point-of-sale terminals.
(13) If the director, upon notice and hearing, determines
at any time that the design or operation of a switch or provision for use
thereof does discriminate against any financial institution in providing access
thereto and use thereof either through access thereto or by virtue of the
cost of its use, he or she may revoke his or her approval of such switch operation
and immediately order the discontinuance of the operation of such switch.
(14) If it is determined by the director, after notice and
hearing, that discrimination against any financial institution has taken place,
that one financial institution has been preferred over another, or that any
financial institution or person has not complied with any of the provisions
of this section, he or she shall immediately issue a cease and desist order
or an order for compliance within ten days after the date of the order, and
upon noncompliance with such order, the offending financial institution shall
be subject to sections 8-1,134 to 8-1,139 and to having the privileges granted
in this section revoked.
(15) For purposes of this section:
(a) Access means the ability to utilize an automatic teller
machine or a point-of-sale terminal to conduct permitted banking transactions
or purchase goods and services electronically;
(b) Access device means a code, a transaction card, or any
other means of access to a customer's account, or any combination thereof,
that may be used by a customer for the purpose of initiating an electronic
funds transfer at an automatic teller machine or a point-of-sale terminal;
(c) Account means a checking account, a savings account, a
share account, or any other customer asset account held by a financial institution.
Such an account may also include a line of credit which a financial institution
has agreed to extend to its customer;
(d) Acquiring financial institution means any financial institution
establishing a point-of-sale terminal;
(e) Affiliate financial institution means any financial institution
which is a subsidiary of the same bank holding company;
(f) Electronic funds transfer means any transfer of funds,
other than a transaction originated by check, draft, or similar paper instrument,
that is initiated through a point-of-sale terminal, an automatic teller machine,
or a personal terminal for the purpose of ordering, instructing, or authorizing
a financial institution to debit or credit an account;
(g) Establishing financial institution means any financial
institution establishing an automatic teller machine which has a main chartered
office or approved branch located in the State of Nebraska;
(h) Financial institution means a state-chartered or federally
chartered bank, savings bank, building and loan association, savings and loan
association, or credit union, or a subsidiary of any such entity;
(i) Foreign financial institution means a financial institution
located outside the United States;
(j) Personal identification number means a combination of
numerals or letters selected for a customer of a financial institution, a
merchant, or any other third party which is used in conjunction with an access
device to initiate an electronic funds transfer transaction;
(k) Personal terminal means a personal computer and telephone,
wherever located, operated by a customer of a financial institution for the
purpose of initiating a transaction affecting an account of the customer;
and
(l) User financial institution means any financial institution
which desires to avail itself of and provide its customers with automatic
teller machine or point-of-sale terminal services.
(16) Nothing in this section prohibits ordinary clearinghouse
transactions between financial institutions.
(17) Nothing in this section requires any federally chartered
establishing financial institution to obtain the approval of the director
for the establishment of any automatic teller machine.
(18) Nothing in this section shall prevent any financial institution
which has a main chartered office or an approved branch located in the State
of Nebraska from participating in a national automatic teller machine program
to allow its customers to use automatic teller machines located outside of
the State of Nebraska which are established by out-of-state financial institutions
or foreign financial institutions or to allow customers of out-of-state financial
institutions or foreign financial institutions to use its automatic teller
machines located in the State of Nebraska. Such participation and any automatic
teller machine usage fees charged or received pursuant to the national automatic
teller machine program or usage fees charged for the use of its automatic
teller machines by customers of out-of-state financial institutions or foreign
financial institutions shall not be considered for purposes of determining
if an automatic teller machine located in the State of Nebraska has been made
available on a nondiscriminating basis for use by customers of any financial
institution which has a main chartered office or approved branch located in
the State of Nebraska which becomes a user financial institution.
(19) An agreement to
operate or share an automatic teller machine may not prohibit, limit, or restrict
the right of the operator or owner of the automatic teller machine to charge
a customer conducting a transaction using an account from a foreign financial
institution an access fee or surcharge not otherwise prohibited under state
or federal law.
| Source | Laws 1987, LB 615, § 3; Laws 1992, LB 470, § 2; Laws 1993, LB 81, § 8; Laws 1993, LB 423, § 2; Laws 1999, LB 396, § 9; Laws 2000, LB 932, § 3; Laws 2002, LB 1089, § 3; Laws 2003, LB 131, § 4; Laws 2004, LB 999, § 2; Laws 2009, LB75, § 1; Laws 2009, LB327, § 4.Changes made by LB75 became effective February 27, 2009. Changes made by LB327 became operative April 9, 2009. |
8-158
Banks; appointment as personal representative or administrator; authorized.Any bank, chartered to conduct a banking business in this state and so authorized by its corporate articles, shall have power to act, either by itself or jointly with any natural person or persons, as personal representative of the estate of any deceased person or as administrator of the estate of any person under the appointment of a court of record having jurisdiction of the estate of such deceased person.
| Source | Laws 1959, c. 18, § 1, p. 142; Laws 1961, c. 14, § 3, p. 107; Laws 1961, c. 16, § 1, p. 116; R.R.S.1943, § 8-1,117; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 58, p. 158; Laws 1973, LB 164, § 17; Laws 1986, LB 909, § 1. |
8-159
Banks; trust department; authorization.Any bank, having adopted or amended its articles of incorporation to authorize the conduct of a trust business as defined in the Nebraska Trust Company Act, may be further chartered by the director to transact a trust company business in a trust department in connection with such bank.
| Source | Laws 1959, c. 19, § 1, p. 143; Laws 1961, c. 14, § 4, p. 107; R.R.S.1943, § 8-1,118; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 59, p. 159; Laws 1993, LB 81, § 9; Laws 1998, LB 1321, § 10. |
8-160
Banks; trust department; amendment of charter; supervision.The director shall have the power to issue to banks amendments to their charters of authority to transact trust business as defined in the Nebraska Trust Company Act and shall have general supervision and control over such trust department of banks.
| Source | Laws 1959, c. 19, § 2, p. 143; Laws 1961, c. 14, § 5, p. 108; R.R.S.1943, § 8-1,119; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 60, p. 159; Laws 1993, LB 81, § 10; Laws 1998, LB 1321, § 11. |
Cross Reference
Nebraska Trust Company Act, see section 8-201.01.
8-161
Banks; trust department; application; investigation; authorization.The director, before granting to any bank the right to operate a trust department, shall require such bank to make an application for amendment of its charter, setting forth such information as the director may require. If, upon investigation, the department shall be satisfied that the bank requesting such charter is operated by stockholders, directors, and officers of integrity and responsibility, the department shall, with such additional capital as the director shall require, issue to such bank an amendment to its charter, entitling it to operate a trust department and entitling it to transact the business provided for in the Nebraska Trust Company Act.
| Source | Laws 1959, c. 19, § 3, p. 144; Laws 1961, c. 14, § 6, p. 108; R.R.S.1943, § 8-1,120; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 61, p. 159; Laws 1993, LB 81, § 11; Laws 1998, LB 1321, § 12. |
Cross Reference
Nebraska Trust Company Act, see section 8-201.01.
8-162
Banks; trust department; separation from other departments; powers; duties.The trust department of a bank when chartered under sections 8-159 to 8-161 shall be separate and apart from every other department of the bank and shall have all of the powers, duties, and obligations of a trust company provided in the Nebraska Trust Company Act.
| Source | Laws 1959, c. 19, § 4, p. 144; Laws 1961, c. 14, § 7, p. 108; R.R.S.1943, § 8-1,121; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 62, p. 159; Laws 1993, LB 81, § 12; Laws 1998, LB 1321, § 13. |
Cross Reference
Nebraska Trust Company Act, see section 8-201.01.
8-162.01
Banks; trust department; conduct of business; location.Any bank authorized to transact a trust company business in a trust department pursuant to sections 8-159 to 8-162 may conduct such trust company business at the office of any bank which is a subsidiary of the same bank holding company as the authorized bank.
| Source | Laws 1993, LB 81, § 13. |
8-162.02
State-chartered bank; fiduciary
account controlled by trust department; collateral; public funds exempt.(1) A state-chartered
bank may deposit or have on deposit funds of a fiduciary account controlled
by the bank's trust department unless prohibited by applicable law.
(2) To the
extent that the funds are not insured or guaranteed by the Federal Deposit
Insurance Corporation, a state-chartered bank shall set aside collateral as
security under the control of appropriate fiduciary officers and bank employees.
The bank shall place pledged assets of fiduciary accounts in the joint custody
or control of not fewer than two of the fiduciary officers or employees of
the bank designated for that purpose by the board of directors. The bank may
maintain the investments of a fiduciary account off-premises if consistent
with applicable law and if the bank maintains adequate safeguards and controls.
The market value of the collateral shall at all times equal or exceed the
amount of the uninsured or unguaranteed fiduciary funds.
(3) A state-chartered
bank may satisfy the collateral requirements of this section with any of the
following: (a) Direct obligations of the United States or other obligations
fully guaranteed by the United States as to principal and interest; (b) readily
marketable securities of the classes in which banks, trust companies, or other
corporations exercising fiduciary powers are permitted to invest fiduciary
funds under applicable state law; and (c) surety bonds, to the extent the
surety bonds provide adequate security, unless prohibited by applicable law.
(4) A state-chartered
bank, acting in its fiduciary capacity, may deposit funds of a fiduciary account
that are awaiting investment or distribution with an affiliated insured depository
institution unless prohibited by applicable law. The bank may set aside collateral
as security for a deposit by or with an affiliate of fiduciary funds awaiting
investment or distribution, as it would if the deposit was made at the bank,
unless such action is prohibited by applicable law.
(5) Public funds deposited
in and held by a state-chartered bank are not subject to this section.
| Source | Laws 2009, LB327, § 2.August 30, 2009 |
8-163
Dividends; withdrawal
of capital or surplus prohibited; not made; when.No
bank shall withdraw or permit to be withdrawn, either in the form of dividends
or otherwise, any part of its capital or surplus without the written permission
of the director. If losses have at any time been sustained equal to or exceeding
the undivided profits on hand, no dividends shall be made without the written permission of the director.
No dividend shall be made by any bank in an amount greater than the net profits
on hand without the written permission of the director. As used in this section,
net profits on hand means the remainder of all
earnings from current operations plus actual recoveries on loans and investments
and other assets after deducting from the total thereof all current operating
expenses, losses, and
bad debts, accrued dividends on preferred stock, if any, and federal and state taxes, for the
present and two immediately preceding calendar years.
| Source | Laws 1909, c. 10, § 34, p. 82; R.S.1913, § 313; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVI, § 34, p. 699; C.S.1922, § 8014; C.S.1929, § 8-153; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 34, p. 152; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-153; R.S.1943, § 8-156; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 63, p. 160; Laws 1988, LB 996, § 3; Laws 2009, LB327, § 5.April 9, 2009 |
8-164
Dividends declared; conditions.The board of directors of any bank may declare dividends on its capital stock but only under the following conditions:
(1) All bad debts required to be charged off by either the directors or the department shall first have been charged off. All debts due any bank on which interest is past due and unpaid for a period of six months, unless such debts are well secured or in the process of collection, shall be considered bad debts within the meaning of this section; and
(2) Twenty percent of the net profits accumulated since the preceding dividend shall first have been carried to the surplus fund unless such surplus fund equals or exceeds the amount of the paid-up capital stock.
| Source | Laws 1909, c. 10, § 28, p. 79; R.S.1913, § 307; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVI, § 28, p. 696; C.S.1922, § 8009; C.S.1929, § 8142; Laws 1930, Spec. Sess., c. 6, § 11, p. 31; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 27, p. 149; Laws 1935, c. 10, § 1, p. 78; Laws 1937, c. 16, § 1, p. 122; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-142; Laws 1943, c. 19, § 4, p. 104; R.S.1943, § 8-143; Laws 1951, c. 10, § 1, p. 82; Laws 1953, c. 7, § 1, p. 71; R.R.S.1943, § 8-143; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 64, p. 160; Laws 1985, LB 653, § 6; Laws 1988, LB 996, § 4; Laws 1994, LB 979, § 6. |
Stockholders ordinarily are entitled to share equally in the distribution of dividends, which should go to the record owners of the stock when such dividends are declared, but this may be varied by agreement between the stockholders, and a purchaser of corporate stock, with notice of such an agreement, takes title to the stock subject thereto. Empson v. Deuel County State Bank, 134 Neb. 597, 279 N.W. 293 (1938).
8-165
Losses; charged to surplus fund; restoration of surplus fund; effect on dividends.Any losses sustained by any bank in excess of its undivided profits shall be charged to its surplus fund. Its surplus fund shall thereafter be reimbursed from the earnings, and no dividends shall thereafter be declared or paid by any such bank, without the written permission of the director, until such surplus fund shall be fully restored to its former amount.
| Source | Laws 1923, c. 191, § 38, p. 458; C.S.1929, § 8-144; R.S.1943, § 8-144; Laws 1949, c. 8, § 1, p. 68; R.R.S.1943, § 8-144; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 65, p. 160; Laws 1988, LB 996, § 5. |
8-166
Banks; reports to department; form; number required; verification; waiver.Every bank shall make to the department not less than two reports during each year according to the form which may be prescribed by the department, which report shall be certified as correct, in the manner prescribed by the department, by the president, vice president, cashier, or assistant cashier and in addition by two members of the board of directors. The director may waive the requirements of this section if a bank files its reports electronically with the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, the Federal Reserve Board, or an electronic collection agent of the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation or the Federal Reserve Board.
| Source | Laws 1909, c. 10, § 17, p. 75; R.S.1913, § 296; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVI, § 17, p. 692; C.S.1922, § 7998; C.S.1929, § 8-129; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 19, p. 144; Laws 1941, c. 10, § 1, p. 80; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-129; R.S.1943, § 8-131; Laws 1957, c. 11, § 1, p. 134; Laws 1961, c. 15, § 2, p. 111; R.R.S.1943, § 8-131; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 66, p. 161; Laws 1997, LB 137, § 7. |
8-167
Banks; reports to department; contents; publication.Each report required by section 8-166 shall exhibit in detail and under appropriate headings the resources and liabilities of the bank at the close of business on any past day specified by the call for report and shall be submitted to the department within thirty days, or as may be required by the department, after the receipt of requisition for the report. A summary of such report in the form prescribed by the department shall be published one time in a legal newspaper in the place where such bank is located. If there is no legal newspaper in the place where the bank is located, then such summary shall be published in a legal newspaper published in the same county or, if none is published in the county, in a legal newspaper of general circulation in the county. Such publication shall be at the expense of such bank. Proof of such publication shall be transmitted to the department within thirty days, or as may be required by the department, from the date fixed for such report.
| Source | Laws 1909, c. 10, § 18, p. 75; R.S.1913, § 297; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVI, § 18, p. 693; C.S.1922, § 7999; C.S.1929, § 8-130; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 20, p. 145; Laws 1941, c. 10, § 2, p. 81; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-130; R.S.1943, § 8-132; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 67, p. 161; Laws 1978, LB 641, § 2; Laws 1986, LB 960, § 1. |
Purpose of Legislature was to require a full statement of the transactions of the officers concerning the business done by them in their official capacities as officers and agents of the bank. Wentz v. State, 108 Neb. 597, 188 N.W. 467 (1922).
8-167.01
Banks; publication requirements not applicable; when.The publication requirements of section 8-167 shall not apply to any bank that makes a disclosure statement available to any member of the general public upon request in compliance with the disclosure of financial information provisions of 12 C.F.R. part 350 or 12 C.F.R. section 208.17.
| Source | Laws 1995, LB 384, § 18. |
8-168
Banks; special reports to department.Any bank shall be required to furnish such special reports as may be required by the department to enable such department to obtain full and complete knowledge of the condition of such bank.
| Source | Laws 1909, c. 10, § 19, p. 76; R.S.1913, § 298; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVI, § 19, p. 693; C.S.1922, § 8000; C.S.1929, § 8-131; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 21, p. 145; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-131; R.S.1943, § 8-133; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 68, p. 161. |
8-169
Banks; reports; published statements; failure to make; penalty, recovery.Any bank that shall fail, neglect, or refuse to make or furnish any report or any published statement required by the Nebraska Banking Act shall pay to the department fifty dollars for each day such failure shall continue, unless the department shall extend the time for filing such report.
| Source | Laws 1909, c. 10, § 20, p. 76; R.S.1913, § 299; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVI, § 20, p. 693; C.S.1922, § 8001; C.S.1929, § 8-132; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 22, p. 146; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-132; R.S.1943, § 8-134; R.R.S.1943, § 8-134; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 59, p. 162; Laws 1973, LB 164, § 18; Laws 1998, LB 1321, § 14. |
This section is referred to as providing penalty in contrasting this section with another section of the banking act which failed to provide a penalty, and holding that the failure to provide a penalty disclosed legislative intent that statute should be directory rather than mandatory. State ex rel. Davis v. Farmers State Bank of Winside, 112 Neb. 597, 200 N.W. 173 (1924).
8-170
Records and files; time required to be kept; destroy, when.(1) Banks shall not be required to preserve or keep their records or files for a longer period than six years next after the first day of January of the year following the time of the making or filing of such records or files except as provided in subsection (2) of this section.
(2)(a) Ledger sheets showing unpaid balances in favor of depositors of banks shall not be destroyed unless the bank has remitted such unpaid balances to the State Treasurer in accordance with the Uniform Disposition of Unclaimed Property Act. Banks shall retain a record of every such remittance for ten years following the date of such remittance.
(b) Corporate records that relate to the corporation or the corporate existence of the bank shall not be destroyed.
| Source | Laws 1949, c. 10, § 1, p. 71; R.R.S.1943, § 8-1,111; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 70, p. 162; Laws 1999, LB 396, § 10. |
Cross Reference
Uniform Disposition of Unclaimed Property Act, see section 69-1329.
8-171
Records; destruction; liability; excuse for failure to produce.No liability shall accrue against any bank destroying any such records after the expiration of the time provided in section 8-170. In any cause or proceedings in which any such records or files may be called in question or be demanded of the bank or any officer or employee thereof, a showing that such records or files have been destroyed in accordance with the terms of sections 8-170 to 8-174 shall be a sufficient excuse for the failure to produce them.
| Source | Laws 1949, c. 10, § 2, p. 71; R.R.S.1943, § 8-1,112; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 71, p. 162. |
8-172
Repealed. Laws 1975, LB 279,§75.
8-173
Actions against bank on claims inconsistent with records; accrual of cause of action; limitations.All causes of action against a bank based upon a claim or claims inconsistent with an entry or entries in any bank record or ledger, made in the regular course of business, shall accrue one year after the date of such entry or entries. No action founded upon such a cause may be brought after the expiration of five years from the date of such accrual.
| Source | Laws 1949, c. 10, § 4, p. 71; Laws 1951, c. 13, § 1, p. 88; R.R.S.1943, § 8-1,114; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 73, p. 163. |
8-174
Records and files; destruction; applicable to national banks so far as may be permitted by laws of United States.The provisions of sections 8-170 to 8-174, so far as may be permitted by the laws of the United States, shall apply to the records and files of national banks.
| Source | Laws 1949, c. 10, § 5, p. 72; R.R.S.1943, § 8-1,115; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 74, p. 163. |
8-175
Banks; false entry or statement; other offenses relating to books and records; penalty.Any person who shall willfully and knowingly subscribe to, or make, or cause to be made, any false statement or false entry in the books of any bank, or shall knowingly subscribe to or exhibit false papers with the intent to deceive any person or persons authorized to examine into the affairs of any such bank, or shall make, state, or publish any false statement of the amount of the assets or liabilities of any such bank, or shall fail to make true and correct entry in the books and records of such bank of its business and transactions in the manner and form prescribed by the department, or shall mutilate, alter, destroy, secrete, or remove any of the books or records of such bank without the written consent of the director, or shall make, state, or publish any false statement of the amount of the assets or liabilities of any such bank, shall be guilty of a Class III felony.
| Source | Laws 1909, c. 10, § 21, p. 77; R.S.1913, § 300; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVI, § 21, p. 694; C.S.1922, § 8002; C.S.1929, § 8-133; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 23, p. 146; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-133; R.S.1943, § 8-135; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 75, p. 163; Laws 1977, LB 40, § 51. |
Crime of making a false statement of condition of a bank with intent to deceive was a felony. State v. Hylton, 175 Neb. 828, 124 N.W.2d 230 (1963).Mere making of false report is not sufficient to sustain conviction under this section, but in addition intent to deceive must be charged and proved. Foreman v. State, 127 Neb. 824, 257 N.W. 237 (1934).In prosecution hereunder it is not essential to the commission of the offense that the statement be made in the presence of two directors of bank. Flannigan v. State, 124 Neb. 748, 248 N.W. 92 (1933).Intent to deceive is an element of the felony described herein. Foreman v. State, 124 Neb. 74, 245 N.W. 422 (1932), 85 A.L.R. 821 (1932).This section applies to minutes of meetings of board of directors. Kienke v. Kirsch, 121 Neb. 688, 238 N.W. 33 (1931).To be guilty under this section, bank officer must willfully and knowingly make the entry, the entry must be false, and it must have been made with intent to deceive. Spearman v. State, 120 Neb. 799, 235 N.W. 465 (1931).Omission by bank officer to include in report to banking department a certificate of deposit caused to be issued by him to pay a personal obligation is making false statement under this section. Wentz v. State, 108 Neb. 597, 188 N.W. 467 (1922).
8-176
Repealed. Laws 1965, c. 141,§2, p. 482.
8-177
Banks; consolidation; approval required; creditors' claims.Any bank, which is in good faith winding up its business for the purpose of consolidating with some other bank, may transfer its resources and liabilities to the bank with which it is in the process of consolidation, but no consolidation shall be made without the consent of the department, nor shall such consolidation operate to defeat the claim of any creditor or hinder any creditor in the collection of his debt against such banks or either of them.
| Source | Laws 1909, c. 10, § 41, p. 86; R.S.1913, § 320; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVI, § 41, p. 701; C.S.1922, § 8021; C.S.1929, § 8-160; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 36, p. 154; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-160; R.S.1943, § 8-164; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 77, p. 164. |
An indebtedness of a bank incurred in an attempted liquidation in violation of this section is ultra vires and does not furnish the foundation for stockholders' double liability. Luikart v. Jones, 138 Neb. 472, 293 N.W. 346 (1940).This section does not, of itself, make a consolidated bank liable for debts of old banks. Wilson v. Continental National Bank, 130 Neb. 614, 266 N.W. 68 (1936).Two state banks cannot consolidate without consent of banking department, and sale of entire capital stock to stockholder, president and director of rival bank is not necessarily a consolidation within the meaning of this section. Cooper v. Bane, 110 Neb. 83, 196 N.W. 119 (1923).
8-178
National bank; reorganization as state bank; authorization; vote required; trust company business; conversion; public hearing; when.Any national banking association located and doing business within the State of Nebraska which follows the procedure prescribed by the laws of the United States may convert into a state bank or merge or consolidate with a state bank upon a vote of the holders of at least two-thirds of the capital stock of such state bank when the resulting state bank meets the requirements of the state law as to the formation of a new state bank. If the national banking association has been further chartered to conduct a trust company business within a trust department of the bank, the trust department to be converted shall meet the requirements of state law as to the formation of a trust company business within a trust department of a state bank.
The public hearing requirement of subdivision (1) of section 8-115.01 and the rules and regulations of the department shall be required only if (1) after publishing a notice of the proposed conversion in a newspaper of general circulation in the county where the main office of the national bank is located, the expense of which shall be paid by the applicant bank, the director receives an objection to the conversion within fifteen days after such publication or (2) in the discretion of the director, the condition of the bank warrants a hearing. If the national bank has been further chartered to conduct a trust company business within a trust department of the bank, the notice of the proposed conversion of the national bank shall include notice that the trust department will be converted in connection with the national bank conversion.
| Source | Laws 1909, c. 11, § 1, p. 96; R.S.1913, § 343; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVI, § 63, p. 711; C.S.1922, § 8043; C.S.1929, § 8-161; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 37, p. 154; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-161; R.S.1943, § 8-165; Laws 1951, c. 11, § 1(1), p. 84; R.R.S.1943, § 8-165; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 78, p. 165; Laws 1995, LB 599, § 3; Laws 2002, LB 957, § 5; Laws 2006, LB 876, § 10. |
8-179
National bank; reorganization as state bank; procedure ; trust company business; charter.(1) The resulting state bank shall file a statement with the department, under the oath of its president or cashier, (a) showing that the procedure prescribed by the laws of the United States and by this state have been followed, (b) setting forth in the statement the matter prescribed by sections 8-121 and 8-1901 to 8-1903, and (c) if the national bank has been further chartered to conduct a trust company business within a trust department of the bank, setting forth the matter prescribed by sections 8-159 to 8-162.01. Upon payment of all applicable fees, the department shall issue to such corporation the certificate provided for in section 8-122, a charter to transact the business provided for in its articles of incorporation, and, if applicable, a charter to conduct a trust company business within a trust department of the bank.
(2) The department may accept good assets of any such national bank, worth not less than par, in lieu of the payment otherwise provided by law for the stock of such resulting bank. When the parties requesting the conversion, merger, or consolidation are officers or directors of either the national bank or of the state bank, they shall be accepted without investigation as parties of integrity and responsibility. Unless the resulting bank is at a different location than the former national or state bank, the department shall recognize the public necessity, convenience, and advantage of permitting the resulting bank and, if applicable, the trust company business within a trust department of the bank, to engage in business.
| Source | Laws 1951, c. 11, § 1(2), p. 84; R.R.S.1943, § 8-165.01; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 79, p. 165; Laws 1995, LB 384, § 5; Laws 2006, LB 876, § 11. |
8-180
State bank; reorganization as national bank; vote required.Any state bank, without the approval of any state authority, may, upon a vote of the holders of at least two-thirds of its capital stock, convert into and merge or consolidate with national banking associations as provided by federal law.
| Source | Laws 1951, c. 11, § 1(3), p. 85; R.R.S.1943, § 8-165.02; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 80, p. 165. |
8-181
National or state bank; conversion, merger, or consolidation; resulting bank; considered same corporate entity; termination of franchise.When a national bank has converted into or merged or consolidated with a state bank, or a state bank has converted into or merged or consolidated with a national bank, the resulting bank shall be considered the same business and corporate entity as the former bank or banks and as a continuation thereof, and the ownership and title to all properties and assets and the obligations and liabilities of the converting, merging, or consolidating banks shall automatically pass to and become the properties and assets and the obligations and liabilities of the resulting bank. Upon the conversion, merger, or consolidation, when the resulting bank is a national bank, the franchise of the converting, merging, or consolidating state bank shall automatically terminate.
| Source | Laws 1951, c. 11, § 1(4), p. 85; R.R.S.1943, § 8-165.03; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 81, p. 166. |
8-182
State bank; conversion, merger, or consolidation with a national bank; objecting stockholders; stock; payment.The owner of shares of a state bank which were voted against a conversion into or a merger or consolidation with a national bank shall be entitled to receive, from the assets of such state bank, the value of such stock in cash, when the merger or consolidation becomes effective, upon written demand made to the resulting bank at any time within thirty days after the effective date of the merger or consolidation, accompanied by the surrender of the stock certificates. The value of such shares shall be determined, as of the date of the shareholders' meeting approving the conversion, merger, or consolidation, by three appraisers, one to be selected by the owners of two-thirds of the shares voting against the conversion, merger, or consolidation, one by the board of directors of the resulting state bank, and the third by the two so chosen. If the appraisal is not completed within sixty days after the merger or consolidation becomes effective the department shall cause an appraisal to be made and such appraisal shall then govern. The expenses of appraisal shall be paid by the resulting bank.
| Source | Laws 1951, c. 11, § 1(5), p. 85; R.R.S.1943, § 8-165.04; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 82, p. 166. |
8-183
National or state bank; conversion, merger, or consolidation; resulting bank; assets; valuation.Without approval by the department, no asset shall be carried on the books of the resulting bank, when the resulting bank is a state bank, at a valuation higher than that on the books of the converting, merging, or consolidating bank at the time of the examination, by a state or national bank examiner, last occurring before the effective date of the conversion, merger, or consolidation.
| Source | Laws 1951, c. 11, § 1(6), p. 86; R.R.S.1943, § 8-165.05; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 83, p. 167. |
8-183.01
State or federal savings association; conversion to state bank; plan of conversion; procedure.(1) Any state or federal savings association, whether formed as a mutual association or a capital stock association, may apply to the director to convert to a state bank.
(2) Any savings association seeking to convert its form of organization pursuant to this section shall first obtain approval of a plan of conversion by resolution adopted by not less than a two-thirds majority vote of the total number of directors authorized to vote.
(3) Upon approval of a plan of conversion by the board of directors, such plan and the resolution approving it shall be submitted to the director. The director shall approve the plan of conversion if he or she finds, after appropriate investigation, that:
(a) The plan of conversion is fair and equitable;
(b) The interests of the applicant, its members or shareholders, its savings account holders, and the public are adequately protected; and
(c) The converting savings association has complied with the requirements of this section.
(4) If the director approves the plan of conversion, the approval shall be in writing and sent to the home office of the converting savings association. As part of its approval, the director may prescribe terms and conditions to be fulfilled either before or after the conversion to cause the converting savings association to conform to the requirements of the Nebraska Banking Act.
(5) If the director disapproves the plan of conversion, the reasons for such disapproval shall be stated in writing and sent to the home office of the converting savings association, which shall be afforded an opportunity to amend and resubmit the plan within a reasonable period of time as prescribed by the director. In the event the director disapproves the plan after such resubmission, written notice of such final disapproval shall be sent by certified mail to the savings association's home office.
| Source | Laws 1998, LB 1321, § 27. |
8-183.02
State or federal savings association; plan of conversion; approval.(1) If the director approves a plan of conversion in accordance with section 8-183.01, such plan shall be submitted for adoption to the members or shareholders of the converting savings association by vote at a meeting called to consider such action. At least three weeks prior to such meeting, a copy of the plan, together with an accurate summary plan description explaining the operation of the plan and the rights, duties, obligations, liabilities, conditions, and requirements which may be imposed upon such members or shareholders and the converted association as a result of the operation of the plan, shall be mailed to each member or shareholder eligible to vote at such meeting.
(2) The plan of conversion must be approved by not less than sixty percent of the total outstanding shares, which may be voted by proxy or in person at the meeting called to consider such conversion.
(3) A certified copy of the proceedings at such meeting shall be filed with the director within thirty days after such meeting.
(4) If the plan of conversion is approved, the board of directors of the savings association shall take action to obtain a state bank charter, adopt articles of incorporation, adopt bylaws, elect directors and officers, and take such other action as is required or appropriate for a state bank corporation.
| Source | Laws 1998, LB 1321, § 28. |
8-183.03
State or federal savings association; conversion to state bank; requirements.(1) To obtain a state bank charter, a savings association shall meet the requirements of state law as to the formation of a new state bank. The public hearing requirement of subdivision (1) of section 8-115.01 shall only be required if (a) after publishing a notice of the proposed conversion in a newspaper of general circulation in the county where the main office of the converting savings association is located, the expense of which shall be paid by the applicant savings association, the director receives a substantive objection to the conversion within fifteen days after such publication or (b) in the discretion of the director, the condition of the savings association warrants a hearing.
(2) If the savings association is a federal association, compliance with the procedure for conversion to a state bank prescribed by the laws of the United States, if any, shall be demonstrated to the director.
(3) When the persons requesting the conversion of the savings association are officers or directors of the savings association, there shall be a rebuttable presumption that such persons are parties of integrity and responsibility.
(4) If the main office of the resulting state bank is to be at the same location as the main office of the converting savings association, the director shall recognize that the public necessity, convenience, and advantage of the community will be met by permitting the resulting bank to engage in business.
(5) The director may make an examination of the applicant savings association prior to his or her decision on the application for a state bank charter. The cost of such examination shall be paid by the applicant savings association.
| Source | Laws 1998, LB 1321, § 29; Laws 2002, LB 957, § 6. |
8-183.04
State or federal savings association; mutual savings association; retention of mutual form authorized.Notwithstanding any other provision of the Nebraska Banking Act or any other Nebraska law, a state or federal savings association which was formed and in operation as a mutual savings association as of July 15, 1998, may elect to retain its mutual form of corporate organization upon conversion to a state bank. All references to shareholders or stockholders for state banks shall be deemed to be references to members for such a converted savings association. The director shall have the power to adopt and promulgate rules and regulations governing such converted mutual savings associations. In adopting and promulgating such rules and regulations, the director may consider the provisions of sections 8-301 to 8-384 governing savings associations in mutual form of corporate organization.
| Source | Laws 1998, LB 1321, § 30; Laws 2005, LB 533, § 10. |
8-183.05
State or federal savings association; issuance of state bank charter; effect; section, how construed.(1) Upon the issuance of a state bank charter to a converting savings association, the corporate existence of the converting association shall not terminate, but such bank shall be a continuation of the entity so converted and all property of the converted savings association, including its rights, titles, and interests in and to all property of whatever kind, whether real, personal, or mixed, things in action, and every right, privilege, interest, and asset of any conceivable value or benefit then existing, or pertaining to it, or which would inure to it, immediately, by operation of law and without any conveyance or transfer and without any further act or deed, shall vest in and remain the property of such converted savings association, and the same shall have, hold, and enjoy the same in its own right as fully and to the same extent as the same was possessed, held, and enjoyed by the converting savings association.
(2) Upon issuance of the charter, the new state bank shall continue to have and succeed to all the rights, obligations, and relations of the converting savings association.
(3) All pending actions and other judicial proceedings to which the converting savings association is a party shall not be abated or discontinued by reason of such conversion but may be prosecuted to final judgment, order, or decree in the same manner as if such conversion had not been made, and such converted savings association may continue the actions in its new corporate name. Any judgment, order, or decree may be rendered for or against the converting savings association theretofore involved in the proceedings.
(4) Nothing in this section shall be construed to authorize a converted savings association to establish branches except as permitted by section 8-157 and the Interstate Branching by Merger Act of 1997. This subsection shall not be construed to require divestiture of any branches of a savings association in existence at the time of the conversion to a state bank charter.
| Source | Laws 1998, LB 1321, § 31; Laws 2002, LB 1089, § 4. |
Cross Reference
Interstate Branching by Merger Act of 1997, see section 8-2101.
8-184
Voluntary liquidation; approval required; examination; fees.Whenever any bank shall desire to go into voluntary liquidation, it shall first obtain the written consent of the department which may, before granting such request, order a special examination of the affairs of such bank, for which the same fees may be collected as in regular examination.
| Source | Laws 1909, c. 10, § 34, p. 83; R.S.1913, § 313; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVI, § 34, p. 699; C.S.1922, § 8014; C.S.1929, § 8-153; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 34, p. 153; C.S.Supp., 1941, § 8-153; R.S.1943, § 8-158; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 84, p. 167. |
8-185
Voluntary liquidation; procedure.Any bank may voluntarily liquidate by paying off all its depositors in full. The bank so liquidating shall file a certified statement with the department, setting forth the fact that all its liabilities have been paid and naming its stockholders with the amount of stock held by each, and surrender its certificate of authority to transact a banking business. The department shall cause an examination to be made of any such bank for the purpose of determining that all of its liabilities, except liabilities to stockholders, have been paid. Upon such examination, if it appears that all liabilities other than liabilities to stockholders have been paid, the bank shall cease to be subject to the Nebraska Banking Act.
| Source | Laws 1909, c. 10, § 42, p. 86; R.S.1913, § 321; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVI, § 42, p. 702; Laws 1921, c. 299, § 1, p. 954; C.S.1922, § 8022; C.S.1929, § 8-169; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 39, p. 155; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-169; R.S.1943, § 8-159; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 85, p. 167; Laws 1987, LB 2, § 10; Laws 1998, LB 1321, § 15. |
8-186
Bank; possession; voluntary surrender to department; notice; posting; liens dissolved.Any bank may place its affairs and assets under the control of the department by posting on its door the following notice: This bank is in the hands of the Department of Banking and Finance. The posting of such notice, or the taking possession of any bank by the department or by any bank examiner shall be sufficient to place all of its assets of whatever nature immediately in the possession of the department, and shall operate as a bar to the levying of attachments or executions thereon, and shall operate to dissolve and release all levies, judgment liens, attachments, or other liens obtained through legal proceedings within sixty days next preceding the posting of such notice or the taking possession of such bank by the department.
| Source | Laws 1909, c. 10, § 43, p. 86; R.S.1913, § 322; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVI, § 43, p. 703; C.S.1922, § 8023; C.S.1929, § 8-170; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 40, p. 156; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-170; R.S.1943, § 8-172; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 86, p. 168. |
8-187
Banks; department may take possession; when; examination of affairs; liens dissolved; retention of possession.Whenever it appears to the department from any examination or report provided for by the laws of this state that the capital of any bank is impaired, or that such bank is conducting its business in an unsafe or unauthorized manner, or is endangering the interests of its depositors, or upon failure of such bank to make any of the reports or statements required by the laws of this state, or if the officers or employees of any bank refuse to submit its books, papers, and affairs to the inspection of any examiner, or if any officer thereof refuses to be examined upon oath touching the affairs of any such bank, or if from any examination or report provided for by law, the department has reason to conclude that such bank is in an unsafe or unsound condition to transact the business for which it is organized, or that it is unsafe and inexpedient for it to continue business, or if any such bank neglects or refuses to observe any order of the department, the department may forthwith take possession of the property and business of the bank and shall thereafter conduct the affairs of the bank, and shall retain possession of all money, rights, credits, assets, and property of every description belonging to the bank, as against any mesne or final process issued by any court against the bank whose property has been taken, and may retain possession for a sufficient time to make an examination of its affairs and dispose thereof as provided by law. All levies, judgment liens, attachments, or other liens obtained through legal proceedings against the bank or its property, acquired within sixty days next preceding the taking of possession, in the event the bank is liquidated and the business of the bank is not resumed or carried on after the taking over thereof by the department, shall be void and the property affected by the levy, judgment lien, attachment, or other lien so obtained shall be wholly discharged and released therefrom. The director shall retain possession of the property and business of the bank until the bank shall resume business or its affairs are finally liquidated as provided in the Nebraska Banking Act.
| Source | Laws 1909, c. 10, § 48, p. 89; R.S.1913, § 328; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVI, § 49, p. 705; C.S.1922, § 8029; Laws 1923, c. 191, § 11, p. 443; Laws 1925, c. 30, § 1, p. 122; Laws 1929, c. 38, § 16, p. 164; C.S.1929, § 8-181; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 42, p. 157; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-181; R.S.1943, § 8-173; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 87, p. 168; Laws 1987, LB 2, § 11; Laws 1998, LB 1321, § 16. |
1. Taking possession2. Liens3. Liquidation4. Reorganization5. Miscellaneous1. Taking possessionThis section empowers the Department of Banking and Finance to take possession of the property and business of a bank and conduct its affairs, retaining possession of all money, rights, credits, assets, and property of every description belonging to the bank, whenever it finds that a bank is conducting its business in an unsafe or unauthorized manner. Even after a court has appointed a receiver to liquidate a banking corporation's assets and business, this section still empowers the Department of Banking and Finance to take possession of that bank and conduct its affairs, since the corporation continues its legal existence. In re Invol. Dissolution of Battle Creek State Bank, 254 Neb. 120, 575 N.W.2d. 356 (1998).Taking over of bank was authorized under this section, and acts performed in reference to closed transactions wherein fraud was not charged were not subject to collateral attack. Torgeson v. Department of Trade and Commerce, 127 Neb. 38, 254 N.W. 735 (1934).Taking over of bank by Department of Banking to manage or liquidate does not effect dissolution of corporation, which retains identity and is subject to suit, provided there is no interference with assets. Svoboda v. Snyder State Bank, 117 Neb. 431, 220 N.W. 566 (1928).In case of noncompliance with provisions for payment of guaranty fund assessments, Department of Banking was authorized to forthwith take possession of property and business of the bank. Abie State Bank v. Bryan, 282 U.S. 765 (1930).Upon first taking possession of bank under this section, and pending determination of what course to pursue, state banking officials are entitled to hold assets as against any mesne or final process issued by any court. Metropolitan Savings Bank & Trust Co. v. Farmers' State Bank, 20 F.2d 775 (8th Cir 1927).2. LiensWhenever the practices or condition of a state bank is such that it is taken in charge by Department of Banking, all attachment liens acquired within thirty days are dissolved. Luikart v. Hunt, 124 Neb. 642, 247 N.W. 790 (1933).Judgment obtained against bank while in hands of state banking officials is not a lien upon real estate of the bank. Brownell v. Svoboda, 118 Neb. 76, 223 N.W. 641 (1929).3. LiquidationUnder this section, prior to 1929 amendment, Guaranty Fund Commission was required to determine within a reasonable time whether it would operate bank as going concern or liquidate it through a receiver. Morrill County v. Bliss, 125 Neb. 97, 249 N.W. 98 (1933).Under prior act, this section did not grant to Department of Banking authority to wind up the affairs of an insolvent state bank without the aid of a court. State ex rel. Sorensen v. State Bank of Minatare, 123 Neb. 109, 242 N.W. 278 (1932).Conveyance of property of bank to trustee for purpose of liquidation and distribution to depositors, creates express trust, and constitutes equitable conversion of real estate into money. Jensen v. Ballmer, 121 Neb. 488, 237 N.W. 613 (1931).Court was not authorized to appoint receiver in foreclosure action to take charge of mortgaged real estate of bank, where its entire assets are already under control of Department of Banking as receiver of bank. Wells v. Farmers State Bank of Overton, 121 Neb. 462, 237 N.W. 402 (1931).State banking officials in charge of bank are entitled to reasonable time to determine whether to turn it back or operate it, and in meantime assets immune from execution; creditor seeking to levy must allege and prove state banking officials have been in charge longer than reasonable. McBride v. Taylor, 117 Neb. 381, 220 N.W. 683 (1928).Where state bank was taken over by Department of Banking and a receiver appointed, the fact of actual insolvency, coupled with admissions by bank directors in statement to department, constituted "voluntary assignment" giving United States priority as to postal funds. Bliss v. United States, 44 F.2d 909 (8th Cir. 1930).This section summarized in reviewing statutory provisions bearing on right of receiver of bank to sue in foreign jurisdiction to recover stockholder's liability. Luikart v. Spurck, 1 F.Supp. 53 (D. Ill. 1932).4. ReorganizationCity not consenting to reorganization plan under this section was entitled to recover balance of deposit unpaid from surety on bond of city treasurer, where bond to secure the deposit had not been given. City of Cozad v. Thompson, 126 Neb. 79, 252 N.W. 606 (1934).Reorganization, recapitalization and reopening of bank taken over by banking officials under this section do not result in the dissolution of the old bank or in the creation of a new bank. Barber v. Bryan, 123 Neb. 566, 243 N.W. 834 (1932).Reorganization of insolvent bank is not binding on nonconsenting depositor, who is entitled to sue reorganized bank and liquidation association, but can recover against reorganized bank only to extent of proportionate share of assets taken over by it. Hessen Siak Shams v. Nebraska State Bank of Bloomfield, 48 F.2d 894 (D. Neb. 1931).5. MiscellaneousUnder facts in this case, denial of motion for continuance under section 8-195 was not erroneous. Elm Creek State Bank v. Department of Banking, 191 Neb. 584, 216 N.W.2d 883 (1974).Department of Banking is vested with general supervision and control of state banks with authority to do all things necessary for protection of depositors therein. Brownell v. Adams, 121 Neb. 304, 236 N.W. 750 (1931).Offense of receiving deposits when bank insolvent is not modified by statute permitting Department of Banking to operate bank as going concern. State v. Kastle, 120 Neb. 758, 235 N.W. 458 (1931).Suit against bank being operated as going concern by Guaranty Fund Commission is not suit against the state. Svoboda v. Snyder State Bank, 117 Neb. 431, 220 N.W. 566 (1928); Metropolitan Savings Bank & Trust Co. of Pittsburgh, Pa. v. Farmers' State Bank of Rosalie, Neb., et al., 20 F.2d 775 (8th Cir. 1927).This section summarized in reviewing statutory provisions bearing upon general supervisory power of Department of Banking over state banks. State ex rel. Davis v. Exchange Bank of Ogallala, 114 Neb. 664, 209 N.W. 249 (1926).This section summarized in reviewing statutory provisions bearing upon duty of Department of Banking to see that banking business is conducted in safe manner and that interests of depositors are protected. State ex rel. Chamberlin v. Morehead, 99 Neb. 146, 155 N.W. 879 (1915).
8-188
Banks; possession by department; effective upon notice.The director, or any deputy or any examiner authorized by the director, may take possession of a bank by handing to the president, cashier or any person in charge of the bank, a written notice that the bank is in the possession of the department.
| Source | Laws 1925, c. 30, § 2, p. 123; C.S.1929, § 8-183; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 45, p. 159; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-183; R.S.1943, § 8-174; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 88, p. 169. |
Under facts in this case, denial of motion for continuance under section 8-195 was not erroneous. Elm Creek State Bank v. Department of Banking, 191 Neb. 584, 216 N.W.2d 883 (1974).
8-189
Banks; attempted prevention of possession by department; penalty.Any officer, director, or employee of a bank, who shall attempt to prevent the department from taking possession of such bank, shall be guilty of a Class I misdemeanor.
| Source | Laws 1923, c. 191, § 14, p. 445; C.S.1929, § 8-184; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 46, p. 159; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-184; R.S.1943, § 8-175; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 89, p. 169; Laws 1977, LB 40, § 52. |
8-190
Banks; possession by department; refusal to deliver; possession by banks; application for court order.Whenever any bank refuses or neglects to deliver possession of its affairs, assets, or property of whatever nature to the department or to any person ordered or appointed to take charge of such bank according to the Nebraska Banking Act, the director shall make an application to the district court of the county in which such bank is located or to any judge thereof for an order placing the department or such person in charge thereof and of its affairs and property. If the judge of the district court having jurisdiction is absent from the district at the time such application is to be made, any judge of the Court of Appeals or Supreme Court may grant such order, but the petition and order of possession shall be forthwith transmitted to the clerk of the district court of the county in which such bank is located.
| Source | Laws 1909, c. 10, § 56, p. 94; R.S.1913, § 336; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVI, § 57, p. 709; C.S.1922, § 8037; C.S.1929, § 8-185; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 47, p. 159; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-185; R.S.1943, § 8-176; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 90, p. 170; Laws 1987, LB 2, § 12; Laws 1991, LB 732, § 12; Laws 1998, LB 1321, § 17. |
8-191
Banks; possession by department; notice to banks and trust companies; notice or knowledge of possession forestalls liens.Upon taking possession of the property and business of any bank, the department shall forthwith give notice of such fact by letter or telegram to all banks or trust companies holding or in possession of any assets of such bank, so far as known by such department. No bank so notified or knowing of such possession by the department shall have a lien or charge for any payment, advance, or clearance thereafter made, or liability thereafter incurred, against any of the assets of the bank of whose property and business the department shall have taken possession unless the bank be continued as a going concern.
| Source | Laws 1923, c. 191, § 16, p. 445; C.S.1929, § 8-187; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 49, p. 160; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-187; R.S.1943, § 8-177; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 91, p. 170. |
Act of Department of Banking in taking over insolvent bank is not subject to collateral attack. Torgeson v. Department of Trade and Commerce, 127 Neb. 38, 254 N.W. 735 (1934).Notice of possession of bank by Department of Banking forestalls all future liens, unless the bank be continued as a going concern. Luikart v. Hunt, 124 Neb. 642, 247 N.W. 790 (1933).
8-192
Banks; possession by department; inventory of assets and liabilities; filing.Upon taking charge of any bank, the director shall cause to be made an inventory in triplicate of all the property, assets, and liabilities of the bank so far as the same can be ascertained. One copy thereof shall be filed in the office of the director, one copy thereof retained in the bank, and after the declaration of insolvency of the bank, as provided in section 8-194, one copy shall be filed with the clerk of the district court of the county in which the bank is located.
| Source | Laws 1929, c. 38, § 21, p. 167; C.S.1929, § 8-188; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 50, p. 161; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-188; R.S.1943, § 8-178; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 92, p. 170. |
Under facts in this case, denial of motion for continuance under section 8-195 was not erroneous. Elm Creek State Bank v. Department of Banking, 191 Neb. 584, 216 N.W.2d 883 (1974).
8-193
Banks; redelivery of possession; bond; departmental supervision; repossession by department.Whenever the officers, directors, stockholders, or owners of any insolvent bank give good and sufficient bond running to the department with an incorporated surety company authorized by the laws of this state to transact such business, conditioned upon the full settlement of all the liabilities of such bank by such officers, directors, stockholders, or owners within a stated time, and the bond is approved by the department, then the department shall turn over all the assets of such bank to the officers, directors, stockholders, or owners of the bank furnishing the bond, reserving the same right to require report of the condition and to examine into the affairs of the bank as existed in the department previous to its closing. If, upon such examination, it is found by the department that the officers, directors, stockholders, or owners are not closing up the affairs of the bank in such manner as to discharge its liabilities and to close up its affairs in a manner satisfactory to the department within a reasonable time, the department shall take immediate possession of the bank for the liquidation thereof as provided in the Nebraska Banking Act.
| Source | Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVI, § 8, p. 688; C.S.1922, § 7989; Laws 1923, c. 191, § 13, p. 444; C.S.1929, § 8-189; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 51, p. 161; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-189; R.S.1943, § 8-179; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 93, p. 171; Laws 1987, LB 2, § 13; Laws 1998, LB 1321, § 18. |
Agreement between stockholders of bank and its depositors and creditors under which bank officers were to liquidate bank does not contravene statute where Department of Banking accepted bank officers' joint and several liability in lieu of surety bond. Department of Banking v. Walker, 131 Neb. 732, 269 N.W. 907 (1936).
8-194
Insolvent banks; determination; declaration by Director of Banking and Finance; filing.Upon determination of insolvency of any bank by the director and failure of owners thereof to restore solvency within the time and in the manner provided by law, or upon violation of the laws of the state by the bank, the director shall make a finding in writing of the condition of the affairs of such bank and a declaration of insolvency and such finding and declaration shall be filed with the clerk of the district court of the county in which such bank is located.
| Source | Laws 1929, c. 38, § 10, p. 162; C.S.1929, § 8-190; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 53, p. 162; Laws 1935, c. 16, § 1, p. 89; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-190; R.S.1943, § 8-180; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 94, p. 171. |
1. Priority of deposits2. Appointment of receiver3. Miscellaneous1. Priority of depositsReceiver takes and holds assets of insolvent bank subject to liens against them as they exist at time court enters decree of insolvency. Wells v. Farmers State Bank of Overton, 124 Neb. 386, 246 N.W. 714 (1933).Priority of unsecured deposits is fixed by status at time of actual closing of bank when court, under this section, adjudges it insolvent and orders it liquidated. State ex rel. Sorensen v. Thurston State Bank, 121 Neb. 407, 237 N.W. 293 (1931).Upon taking possession of bank under this section, priority of United States attaches for debts due from bank. United States v. Bliss, 40 F.2d 935 (D. Neb. 1930), affirmed on appeal, Bliss v. United States, 44 F.2d 909 (8th Cir. 1930).2. Appointment of receiverAmendment of 1933 manifested legislative intent to provide for administrative rather than judicial receivership of banks. Farmers State Bank of Clarks v. Luikart, 131 Neb. 692, 269 N.W. 627 (1936).Appointment of receiver for purposes of liquidation includes power in receiver to sue for recovery of assets and for losses which bank has suffered by wrongful acts of its officers in violation of their bonds. Luikart v. Flannigan, 130 Neb. 901, 267 N.W. 165 (1936).Appointment of receiver and judicial determination of deficiency of assets does not vest court appointing receiver with exclusive jurisdiction to try an equity suit for purpose of determining liability of stockholders. Parker v. Luehrmann, 126 Neb. 1, 252 N.W. 402 (1934).3. MiscellaneousIn a proceeding by a state bank under section 8-195, the bank has the burden to establish that declaration of insolvency hereunder was erroneous. Elm Creek State Bank v. Department of Banking, 191 Neb. 584, 216 N.W.2d 883 (1974).This section does not constitute an unlawful delegation of judicial power to an executive department of government. Department of Banking v. Hedges, 136 Neb. 382, 286 N.W. 277 (1939).Taking over of banking corporation by Department of Banking does not effect a dissolution of corporation; it retains its corporate capacity and may be sued on its contracts. Torgeson v. Department of Trade and Commerce, 127 Neb. 38, 254 N.W. 735 (1934).Receiver of insolvent Nebraska state bank may sue to recover stockholder's double liability in foreign jurisdiction. Luikart v. Spurck, 1 F.Supp. 53 (D. Ill. 1932).
8-195
Insolvent banks; possession by Director of Banking and Finance; petition to enjoin; show cause order; findings by district court; disposition of case.Whenever any bank of whose property and business the director has taken possession or whose insolvency has been declared as provided in section 8-194 deems itself aggrieved thereby, it may, at any time not later than ten days after such declaration of insolvency has been filed with the clerk of the district court of the county in which the bank is located, petition the district court to enjoin further proceedings, and the court, after citing the director to show cause why further proceedings should not be enjoined, and hearing the allegations and proofs of the parties and determining the facts, may, upon proof by the bank, its officers or directors, that it is solvent, that the business of the bank has been and is being conducted as provided by law, that it is not endangering the interests of its depositors and other creditors, and that the director has acted arbitrarily and abused his discretion either by taking possession of the bank or by finding and declaring the bank to be insolvent and ordering its liquidation, set aside such declaration of insolvency and enjoin the director from proceeding further, and direct him to surrender the business and property to the bank. On proof that the bank is insolvent and that its stockholders have failed to restore solvency as provided by law, or that the bank is being operated in violation of law, and that the director has acted within his powers, the petition shall be dismissed by the court.
| Source | Laws 1929, c. 38, § 10, p. 162; C.S.1929, § 8-190; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 53, p. 162; Laws 1935, c. 16, § 1, p. 89; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-190; R.S.1943, § 8-181; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 95, p. 172. |
In a proceeding by a state bank hereunder, the bank has burden to establish that a declaration of insolvency under section 8-194 was erroneous. Elm Creek State Bank v. Department of Banking, 191 Neb. 584, 216 N.W.2d 883 (1974).
8-196
Insolvent banks; liquidation; injunction; appeal; bond.An appeal shall operate as a stay of judgment of the district court, and no bond need be given if the appeal is taken by the director, but if the appeal is taken by such bank, a bond shall be given as required by law for appeal in civil cases.
| Source | Laws 1933, c. 18, § 53, p. 162; Laws 1935, c. 16, § 1, p. 89; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-190; R.S.1943, § 8-182; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 96, p. 172; Laws 1991, LB 732, § 13. |
8-197
Insolvent banks; liquidation by Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation or by liquidating trustees.Pending final judgment on the petition to enjoin, the director shall retain possession of the property and business of the bank. If not enjoined, the director shall proceed to liquidate the affairs of such bank as provided in the Nebraska Banking Act, except that: (1) The Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation may, under the laws of this state, accept the appointment as receiver or liquidator of any insolvent state bank the deposits of which are insured by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation; or (2) when any state bank is declared insolvent and ordered to be liquidated and the deposits of such bank are not insured by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, then depositors and other creditors of such insolvent state bank, representing fifty-one percent or more of the deposit and other claims in number and in amount of the total thereof, shall have the right to liquidate such insolvent bank by and through liquidating trustees, who shall have the same power as the department and the director to liquidate such bank if, within thirty days after the filing of the declaration of insolvency, articles of trusteeship executed and acknowledged by fifty-one percent or more of the depositors and other creditors in number, representing fifty-one percent or more of the total of all deposits and claims in such bank, are filed with the director. The articles creating the trusteeship shall be in writing, shall name the trustees, shall state the terms and conditions of such trust, and shall become effective when it is determined by the director that fifty-one percent or more of the depositors and other creditors in number, representing fifty-one percent or more of the total of all deposits and claims in such bank, have signed and acknowledged the same. All nonconsenting depositors and other creditors of the insolvent bank shall be held to be subject to the terms and conditions of such trusteeship to the same extent and with the same effect as if they had joined in the execution thereof, and their respective claims shall be treated in all respects as if they had joined in the execution of such articles of trusteeship. Upon finding that such articles have been executed and acknowledged as provided in this section, the director shall thereupon transfer all of the assets of the insolvent bank to such liquidating trustees and take their receipt therefor, and all duties and responsibilities of the department and the director as otherwise provided by law with respect to such liquidation shall be assumed by such liquidating trustees. The director shall then be relieved from further responsibility in connection therewith, and the director and the person who issued the applicable bond or equivalent commercial insurance policy shall be released from further liability on the director's official bond or equivalent commercial insurance policy in respect to such liquidation. The trustees shall then proceed to liquidate such bank as nearly as may be in the manner provided by law for the liquidation of insolvent banks by the department acting as receiver and liquidating agent.
When the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation or any party other than the department is appointed receiver and liquidating agent of an insolvent bank or other financial institution, all references to the department or the director as provided in the act for the liquidation of banks and financial institutions shall mean the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation or other appointed receiver and liquidating agent.
| Source | Laws 1933, c. 18, § 53, p. 163; Laws 1935, c. 16, § 1, p. 90; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-190; R.S.1943, § 8-183; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 97, p. 173; Laws 1987, LB 2, § 14; Laws 1988, LB 994, § 1; Laws 1998, LB 1321, § 19; Laws 2004, LB 884, § 5. |
8-198
Financial institutions; designation of receiver and liquidating agent; department; powers.The department may be designated the receiver and liquidating agent for any financial institution subject to the department's jurisdiction and, subject to the district court's supervision and control, may proceed to liquidate such institution or reorganize it in accordance with the Nebraska Banking Act.
| Source | Laws 1929, c. 38, § 11, p. 163; C.S.1929, § 8-192; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 52, p. 162; Laws 1941, c. 9, § 1, p. 79; Laws 1941, c. 180, § 1, p. 700; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-192; R.S.1943, § 8-184; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 98, p. 174; Laws 1985, LB 653, § 7; Laws 1998, LB 1321, § 20. |
This section does not constitute an unlawful delegation of judicial power to an executive department of government. Department of Banking v. Hedges, 136 Neb. 382, 286 N.W. 277 (1939).Under 1929 act, Department of Banking was ineligible to be appointed judicial receiver as it is not a qualified legal entity. State ex rel. Sorensen v. Hoskins State Bank, 132 Neb. 878, 273 N.W. 834 (1937).Under 1929 act, the appointment of a receiver was a judicial act to be performed by the courts. State ex rel. Sorensen v. Nebraska State Bank, 124 Neb. 449, 247 N.W. 31 (1933).Under 1929 act, this section in a judicial proceeding amounted to no more than a legislative recommendation to the judiciary to appoint secretary as receiver. State ex rel. Sorensen v. State Bank of Minatare, 123 Neb. 109, 242 N.W. 278 (1932).
8-199
Financial institutions; department as receiver; powers; no compensation to director.Whenever the department has been designated receiver for an institution subject to its jurisdiction, the department shall have all the powers and privileges provided by the laws of this state with respect to any other receiver and such incidental powers as shall be necessary to carry out an orderly and efficient liquidation or reorganization of any financial institution for which the department may have become receiver, either by operation of law or by judicial appointment. Acting by and through the director, the department may in its own name as such receiver enforce on behalf of such institution or its creditors or shareholders, by actions at law or in equity, all debts or other obligations of whatever kind or nature due to such institution or the creditors or shareholders thereof. In like manner, the department may make, execute, and deliver any and all deeds, assignments, and other instruments necessary and proper to effectuate any sale of real or personal property, or the settlement of any obligations belonging or due to such financial institution for which the department may have become receiver, or its creditors or shareholders, when such sale or settlement is approved by the district court of the county in which such institution is located. The director shall receive no fees, salary, or other compensation for his or her services in connection with the liquidation or reorganization of such institutions other than his or her salary.
| Source | Laws 1941, c. 9, § 1, p. 79; Laws 1941, c. 180, § 1, p. 700; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-192; R.S.1943, § 8-185; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 99, p. 174; Laws 1985, LB 653, § 8. |
In the absence of an allegation of an individual harm upon which a claimant can directly bring suit, claims are derivative and are properly pursued by the receiver under section 8-199 (Reissue 1983). Weimer v. Amen, 235 Neb. 287, 455 N.W.2d 145 (1990).Section 8-199 (Reissue 1983) does not unconstitutionally deny access to the courts, violate due process, nor take property for a public purpose without just compensation. Weimer v. Amen, 235 Neb. 287, 455 N.W.2d 145 (1990).Section 8-199 (Reissue 1983) granted the receiver broad authority to enforce all debts or other obligations of whatever kind or nature due to the creditors of the failed institution which arose by virtue of the institution's insolvency. Weimer v. Amen, 235 Neb. 287, 455 N.W.2d 145 (1990).
8-1,100
Insolvent banks; liquidation; special deputies, assistants, counsel; appointment; compensation; discharge.The director may, under his hand and official seal, appoint such special deputies or assistants as he may find necessary for the efficient and economical liquidation of insolvent banks, with powers specified in the certificate of appointment, to assist him in the liquidation. The certificate shall be filed in the office of the director and a certified copy in the office of the clerk of the district court of the county in which such bank is located. He may also employ such counsel and expert assistance as may be necessary to perform the work of liquidation. He shall, subject to the approval of the district court of the county in which the insolvent bank is located, fix the compensation for the services rendered by such special deputies, assistants, and counsel, which shall be taxed as costs of the liquidation. He may discharge such special deputies, assistants, or counsel at any time or may assign them to one or more liquidations or transfer them from one liquidation to another.
| Source | Laws 1929, c. 38, § 13, p. 163; C.S.1929, § 8-194; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 56, p. 164; Laws 1933, c. 96, § 2, p. 382; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-194; R.S.1943, § 8-186; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 100, p. 175. |
Under this section, the Director of Banking is given power to appoint deputies and assistants, with powers specified in a certificate of appointment, to assist him in the liquidation. Department of Banking v. Hedges, 136 Neb. 382, 286 N.W. 277 (1939).This section referred to in stating contentions of parties that former method of liquidating insolvent banks had been changed by 1929 act. State ex rel. Sorensen v. State Bank of Minatare, 123 Neb. 109, 242 N.W. 278 (1932).
8-1,101
Insolvent banks; liquidation; special deputies, assistants; bond or insurance; conditions.Upon the declaration of insolvency, the director shall require bonds or equivalent commercial insurance policies from the special deputies or assistants in sums and with such condition as the director shall specify, to be approved by the Governor. The costs of any such bond or policy shall be taxed as costs in the liquidation. Such bond or policy shall be conditioned for the faithful performance of duty, and include indemnity to the department as receiver and liquidating agent.
| Source | Laws 1929, c. 38, § 14, p. 164; C.S.1929, § 8-195; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 60, p. 165; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-195; R.S.1943, § 8-187; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 101, p. 175; Laws 2004, LB 884, § 6. |
8-1,102
Insolvent banks; department as receiver and liquidating agent; liens dissolved; assets; transfers to defraud creditors; preferences.Upon the declaration of insolvency of a bank by the director, the department shall become the receiver and liquidating agent to wind up the business of that bank, and the department shall be vested with the title to all of the assets of such bank wheresoever the same may be situated and whatsoever kind and character such assets may be, as of the date of the filing of the declaration of insolvency with the clerk of the district court of the county in which such bank is located. All levies, judgment liens, attachments, or other liens obtained through legal proceedings against such bank or its property acquired within sixty days next preceding the filing of the declaration of insolvency shall be void, and the property affected by the levy, judgment lien, attachment, or other lien obtained through legal proceedings, shall be wholly discharged and released therefrom. If at any time within sixty days prior to the taking over by the director of a bank which is later declared insolvent any transfers of the assets of such bank are made to prevent liquidation and distribution of such assets to the bank's creditors as provided in the Nebraska Banking Act or if any transfers are made so as to create a preference of one creditor over another, such transfers shall be void and the director shall be entitled to recover such assets for the benefit of the trust.
| Source | Laws 1933, c. 18, § 54, p. 163; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-1,127; R.S.1943, § 8-188; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 102, p. 176; Laws 1987, LB 2, § 15; Laws 1998, LB 1321, § 21. |
8-1,103
Insolvent banks; liquidation; Director of Banking and Finance; powers.For the purpose of executing and performing any of the powers and duties hereby conferred upon him or her, the director may, in the name of the department or the delinquent bank or in his or her own name as director, prosecute and defend any and all suits and other legal proceedings and may, in the name of the department or the delinquent bank or in his or her own name as director, execute, acknowledge, and deliver any and all deeds, assignments, releases, and other instruments necessary and proper to effectuate any sale of real or personal property or sale or compromise authorized by order of the court as provided in the Nebraska Banking Act. Any deed or other instrument executed pursuant to such authority shall be valid and effectual for all purposes as though the same had been executed by the officers of the delinquent bank by authority of its board of directors.
| Source | Laws 1933, c. 18, § 58, p. 165; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-1,129; R.S.1943, § 8-189; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 103, p. 176; Laws 1987, LB 2, § 16; Laws 1998, LB 1321, § 22. |
Department of Banking is a legal entity entitled to sue and defend under this section. Department of Banking v. Hedges, 136 Neb. 382, 286 N.W. 277 (1939).
8-1,104
Insolvent banks; liquidation; Director of Banking and Finance; collection of debts; sale or compromise of certain debts; procedure; deposit or investment of funds.Upon taking possession of the property and business of any bank, the director shall collect all money due to such bank and do such other acts as are necessary to conserve its assets and business and, on declaration of insolvency, he or she shall proceed to liquidate the affairs thereof as provided in the Nebraska Banking Act. He or she shall collect all debts due to and belonging to such bank. If he or she desires to sell or compromise any or all bad or doubtful debts or any or all of the real and personal property of such bank, he or she shall apply to the district court of the county in which the bank is located for an order permitting such sale or compromise on such terms and in such manner as the court may direct. All money so collected by the director may be, from time to time, deposited in one or more state banks or national banks. No deposits of such money shall be made unless a pledge of assets, a depository bond, or both are given as security for such deposit. All depository banks are authorized to give such security. The director may invest a portion or all of such money in short-time interest-bearing securities of the federal government.
| Source | Laws 1933, c. 18, § 67, p. 169; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-1,131; R.S.1943, § 8-190; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 104, p. 177; Laws 1987, LB 2, § 17; Laws 1998, LB 1321, § 23. |
This section does not constitute an unlawful delegation of judicial power to an executive department of government. Department of Banking v. Hedges, 136 Neb. 382, 286 N.W. 277 (1939).
8-1,105
Insolvent banks; reorganization or liquidation proceedings; district judge; jurisdiction.In any proceeding in connection with the insolvency, liquidation, or reorganization of a bank of which a district court has jurisdiction, a judge of the district court shall exercise such jurisdiction in any county in the judicial district for which he was elected to perform any official act in the manner and with the same effect as he might exercise in the county in which the matter arose, or to which it may have been transferred, and he may perform any such act in chambers with the same effect as in open court.
| Source | Laws 1925, c. 30, § 16, p. 131; C.S.1929, § 8-191; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 55, p. 163; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-191; R.S.1943, § 8-191; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 105, p. 178. |
Powers of district judge may be exercised at chambers. Mueller v. Keeley, 163 Neb. 613, 80 N.W.2d 707 (1957).Under this section, jurisdiction is conferred upon a judge of the district court to act in chambers in connection with the insolvency, liquidation or reorganization of a bank with the same effect as in open court. Department of Banking v. Hedges, 136 Neb. 382, 286 N.W. 277 (1939).Appointment of receiver and judicial determination of deficiency of assets does not vest court appointing receiver with exclusive jurisdiction to try an equity suit for purpose of determining liability of stockholders. Parker v. Luehrmann, 126 Neb. 1, 252 N.W. 402 (1934).Section sustained as constitutional, and suit for accounting brought by depositor against receiver of bank and state banking officials is a proceeding which may be tried in chambers under this section. Morrill County v. Bliss, 125 Neb. 97, 249 N.W. 98 (1933).This section referred to in stating contentions of parties that former method of liquidating insolvent banks had been changed by 1929 act. State ex rel. Sorensen v. State Bank of Minatare, 123 Neb. 109, 242 N.W. 278 (1932).On order to show cause, filed by bank receiver in district court of county where receivership proceedings are pending, court has jurisdiction, at chambers in another county, to adjudicate whether possession of land should be surrendered to receiver. State ex rel. Spillman v. Neligh State Bank, 116 Neb. 858, 219 N.W. 392 (1928).
8-1,106
Insolvent banks; claims; filing; time limit.The director, within twenty days after the declaration of insolvency of a bank, shall file with the clerk of the district court of the county in which such bank is located, a list setting forth the name and address of each of the creditors of such bank as shown by the books thereof or who are known by the director to be creditors, and within thirty days after filing the list of creditors, he shall also file an order fixing the time and place for filing claims against such bank. The time fixed for filing claims shall not be more than sixty days nor less than thirty days from the date of the filing of the order, and within seven days after the filing of such order, the director shall mail to each known creditor of such bank a copy of the order and a blank form for proof of claim. The director shall also post a copy of the order on the door of the bank, and within two weeks from the date of the order he shall cause notice to be given by publication, in such newspapers as he may direct, once each week for two successive weeks, calling on all persons who may have claims against the bank to present them to the director within the time and the place provided for in the order and to make proof thereof. Such claims shall be sworn to by the creditor or his representative. Any claim, other than claims for deposits and exchange, not presented and filed within the time fixed by such order shall be forever barred. Claims for deposits or exchange as shown by the books of the bank presented after the expiration of the time fixed in the order for filing claims may be allowed by the director upon a showing being made by the creditor, within six months from the date of the expiration of the time for filing claims as fixed by the order, that he did not have knowledge of the closing of the bank and did not receive notice within time to permit the filing of his claim before the time fixed for filing claims had expired.
| Source | Laws 1923, c. 191, § 21, p. 448; C.S.1929, § 8-198; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 62, p. 167; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-198; R.S.1943, § 8-192; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 106, p. 178. |
Section applies not only to depositor's claims but to all claims against assets in hands of receiver, and allowance of claim constitutes judgment. State ex rel. Spillman v. Platte Valley State Bank, 128 Neb. 562, 259 N.W. 643 (1935).Special time limit for filing claims against insolvent state bank will be applied to bar claims only when the record affirmatively shows compliance with statutory procedure and conditions. State ex rel. Spillman v. State Bank of Papillion, 119 Neb. 525, 232 N.W. 585 (1930).Duty of receiver to pay taxes before depositors whether claim for taxes filed or not, notwithstanding order of court barring claims not filed. State ex rel. Spillman v. Ord State Bank, 117 Neb. 189, 220 N.W. 265 (1928).
8-1,107
Insolvent banks; claims; listing and classification; notice to claimant; filing of objection; powers and duties of Director of Banking and Finance.(1) Upon the expiration of the time fixed for presentation of claims, the director shall thoroughly investigate all claims and file with the clerk of the district court of the county in which said bank is located a complete list of all claims against which he knows of no defense and which, in his judgment, are valid, designating their priority of payment, together with a list of the claims which, in his judgment, are invalid. He shall also file an order allowing or rejecting such claims as classified.
(2) When the director reclassifies or rejects a claim, which rejection shall be made when he doubts the justice of a claim, he shall serve written notice of such reclassification or rejection upon the claimant by either registered or certified mail and file, with the clerk of the district court of the county in which the bank is located, an affidavit of the service of such notice, which affidavit shall be prima facie evidence of such service. Such notice shall state the time and place for the filing by claimant of his objections to the classification, reclassification, or rejection of his claim.
| Source | Laws 1923, c. 191, § 22, p. 449; C.S.1929, § 8-199; Laws 1930, Spec. Sess., c. 6, § 9, p. 30; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 63, p. 168; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-199; R.S.1943, § 8-193; Laws 1957, c. 242, § 4, p. 818; R.S.1943, § 8-193; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 107, p. 179. |
This section does not constitute an unlawful delegation of judicial power to an executive department of government. Department of Banking v. Hedges, 136 Neb. 382, 286 N.W. 277 (1939).
8-1,108
Insolvent banks; claims; objections to classification; hearing.Any person objecting to the classification of his claim and the order based thereon must, within thirty days of the filing of the classification and order with the clerk of the district court, begin an action in that court asking to reclassify his claim and to set aside the order of the director. Notice of this action shall be given by the service of a copy of the petition therein upon the director, who shall, within thirty days of such service, file his answer or other pleading. The court shall then set the matter for hearing at the earliest convenient date and shall try the issues and determine the same according to the usual procedure in matters of equity.
| Source | Laws 1923, c. 191, § 23, p. 449; C.S.1929, § 8-1,100; Laws 1930, Spec. Sess., c. 6, § 10, p. 31; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 64, p. 168; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-1,100; R.S.1943, § 8-194; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 108, p. 179. |
When payment of a dividend is deferred by reason of an unsuccessful contest of an alleged setoff, the creditor so delayed should be allowed interest on the dividend to put that creditor on an equality with the other creditors in his class. Colburn v. Ley, 191 Neb. 427, 215 N.W.2d 869 (1974).Where any controversy over allowance of claims arises under this section, judicial power is invoked. Department of Banking v. Hedges, 136 Neb. 382, 286 N.W. 277 (1939).An order fixing a time for filing of petitions of intervention by claimants under this section is not a final judgment, and may be modified at a subsequent term without compliance with the general statute authorizing modification of final judgments at subsequent terms. State ex rel. Sorensen v. South Omaha State Bank, 135 Neb. 478, 282 N.W. 382 (1938).
8-1,109
Insolvent banks; claims; certificate of allowance; assignment; payments endorsed on certificate.Upon the allowance of a claim against an insolvent bank, the director shall, upon request of the claimant, issue and deliver to the claimant a certificate of indebtedness showing the amount of the claim, the date of the allowance thereof, and whether such claim is one having priority of payment or is a general claim. Any assignment of a claim or certificate of indebtedness shall be filed with the director and shall not be binding until so filed. Upon payment of any dividend on a claim, evidenced by a certificate of indebtedness, such certificate shall be presented and an endorsement of such payment shall be made thereon.
| Source | Laws 1929, c. 38, § 22, p. 167; C.S.1929, § 8-1,101; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 65, p. 169; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-1,101; R.S.1943, § 8-195; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 109, p. 180. |
8-1,110
Insolvent banks; claims; priority.The claims of depositors for deposits not otherwise secured and claims of holders of exchange shall have priority over all other claims, except federal, state, county, and municipal taxes, and subject to such taxes shall, at the time of the declaration of insolvency of a bank, be a first lien on all the assets of the bank from which they are due and thus in liquidation, but no claim to priority shall be allowed which is based upon any evidence of indebtedness in the hands of or originally issued to any stockholder, officer, or employee of such bank and which represents money obtained by such stockholder, officer, or employee from himself or some other person, firm, corporation, or bank in lieu of or for the purpose of effecting a loan of funds to such failed bank.
| Source | Laws 1909, c. 10, § 52, p. 92; R.S.1913, § 332; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVI, § 53, p. 707; C.S.1922, § 8033; Laws 1923, c. 191, § 24, p. 450; Laws 1925, c. 30, § 12, p. 129; Laws 1929, c. 38, § 19, p. 166; Laws 1929, c. 39, § 1, p. 169; C.S.1929, § 8-1,102; Laws 1930, Spec. Sess., c. 6, § 7, p. 28; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 66, p. 169; Laws 1935, c. 16, § 2, p. 91; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-1,102; R.S.1943, § 8-196; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 110, p. 180. |
1. Priority allowed2. Priority disallowed3. Trust fund4. Miscellaneous1. Priority allowedStatute impresses on assets of failed state bank a first lien for depositors and holders of exchange. State ex rel. Sorensen v. State Bank of Omaha, 128 Neb. 148, 258 N.W. 260 (1934).By use of term "otherwise secured" Legislature intended to exclude from participation in the lien only such depositors as take security for their deposits and in some degree deplete the assets of the bank. State ex rel. Sorensen v. Bank of Campbell, 125 Neb. 485, 251 N.W. 101 (1933).Priority of lien hereunder fixed by status at time of adjudication of insolvency. Wells v. Farmers State Bank of Overton, 124 Neb. 386, 246 N.W. 714 (1933).A judgment lien upon the guaranty fund was created by allowance of claim for deposits, and Legislature could not transfer assets of the guaranty fund subject to such lien to depositors' final settlement fund. Bliss v. Bryan, 123 Neb. 461, 243 N.W. 625 (1932).Payee of draft drawn by bank becoming insolvent before draft paid is holder of exchange hereunder and entitled to payment as a depositor. State ex rel. Sorensen v. First State Bank of Alliance, 123 Neb. 23, 241 N.W. 783 (1932).Proceeds of forged notes fraudulently endorsed and negotiated by payee may become deposit, chargeable upon guaranty fund, in bank operated and controlled by him. State ex rel. Spillman v. Dunbar State Bank, 120 Neb. 325, 232 N.W. 578 (1930).County deposit, not protected by bank depository bond, held not otherwise secured, and therefore entitled to priority. State ex rel. Spillman v. Dunbar State Bank, 119 Neb. 335, 228 N.W. 868 (1930).Renewal of certificate held by officer did not effect loan to bank and was, therefore, entitled to priority. State ex rel. Spillman v. Citizens State Bank of Potter, 117 Neb. 358, 220 N.W. 593 (1928).Bank paying drafts drawn upon it by correspondent bank which fails is subrogated to rights of original holders of the drafts, and entitled to priority under this section. Nebraska Nat. Bank v. Bruning, 114 Neb. 719, 209 N.W. 510 (1926).Deposits by bank officer, as trustee, of trust funds raised to assist bank as well as another corporation with which officer is connected, although erroneously credited to officer individually, are entitled to priority. State ex rel. Davis v. Exchange Bank of Ogallala, 114 Neb. 664, 209 N.W. 249 (1926).Notes discounted by solvent bank for another, and credited to the latter, constitute deposit entitled to priority. State ex rel. Davis v. Newcastle State Bank, 114 Neb. 389, 207 N.W. 683 (1926).Deposit of own money by stockholder, who does nothing to effect loan to bank from any source is entitled to priority; otherwise, where he deposits money borrowed from another to assist bank. State ex rel. Davis v. Farmers State Bank, 113 Neb. 348, 203 N.W. 572 (1925).Certificate of deposit issued in payment for negotiable paper in good faith sold to bank by stockholder without fraud or collusion is entitled to priority. State ex rel. Davis v. Farmers State Bank of Allen, 113 Neb. 82, 201 N.W. 893 (1925).Certificates of deposit are not deprived of priority, although excessive interest paid thereon, where bank officer agrees individually to pay the excess and holder had no knowledge that bank paid it. State ex rel. Davis v. Farmers State Bank of Benedict, 112 Neb. 474, 199 N.W. 839 (1924).Entire county deposit, although in excess of fifty percent of bank's capital as limited by general revenue statute, is entitled to priority. State ex rel. Davis v. Peoples State Bank of Anselmo, 111 Neb. 126, 196 N.W. 912 (1923), opinion vacated 111 Neb. 136, 198 N.W. 1018 (1924).Good faith deposit subject to check, drawing interest not exceeding statutory rate, is entitled to priority. Central State Bank v. Farmers State Bank, 101 Neb. 210, 162 N.W. 637 (1917).United States held entitled to priority over depositors as to postal funds. Bliss v. United States, 44 F.2d 909 (8th Cir. 1930).2. Priority disallowedSureties who are liable on bond given to secure deposit of village in bank which becomes insolvent, and recoup part of their loss by selling bonds given them by the bank for their protection, are not entitled to preferred claim against assets of bank. Shumway v. Department of Banking, 130 Neb. 491, 265 N.W. 553 (1936), opinion withdrawn 131 Neb. 246, 267 N.W. 469 (1936).Municipal funds deposited in state bank and protected by depository bond, premium of which is paid by bank, becomes, on failure of bank, a deposit "otherwise secured" within the statute, and precludes municipality from obtaining preference or participating in distribution of assets on par with unsecured creditors. State ex rel. Sorensen v. South Omaha State Bank, 129 Neb. 43, 260 N.W. 278 (1935).Deposit of city funds in state bank is "otherwise secured" where city requires bank to give depository bond and pay premium therefor. State ex rel. Sorensen v. State Bank of Omaha, 125 Neb. 492, 251 N.W. 99 (1933).Insolvent bank may not prefer a depositor by exchange of note and mortgage taken from its assets for depositor's certificate of deposit. Luikart v. Hunt, 124 Neb. 642, 247 N.W. 790 (1933).City exacting security for deposits is to be classified as "otherwise secured" under this section and is not entitled to share as preferred creditor in assets of bank and depositor's final settlement fund, and city's claim as to unsecured balance of deposits should be allowed as general claim only. State ex rel. Sorensen v. First State Bank of Alliance, 122 Neb. 109, 239 N.W. 646 (1931).Where bonds left with bank for safekeeping were sold and proceeds converted by bank officers, certificates of deposit being substituted therefor without the owner's knowledge or authority, claim was not entitled to priority, because the money or its equivalent was not shown to have been placed in or at the command of the bank, and therefore no deposit was created. State ex rel. Spillman v. Dunbar State Bank, 119 Neb. 763, 230 N.W. 687 (1930).Stockholder who procures and places in bank money to meet pressing demand or to replenish reserve, not for his own use or convenience, is not depositor entitled to priority. State ex rel. Spillman v. Farmers State Bank of Wolbach, 117 Neb. 448, 220 N.W. 569 (1928); State ex rel. Spillman v. Citizens State Bank of Potter, 117 Neb. 358, 220 N.W. 593 (1928); State ex rel. Spillman v. Security State Bank of Eddyville, 116 Neb. 521, 218 N.W. 408 (1928); State ex rel. Spillman v. Farmers State Bank of Dix, 115 Neb. 574, 214 N.W. 4 (1927); State ex rel. Spillman v. Atlas Bank of Neligh, 114 Neb. 646, 209 N.W. 333 (1926).Stockholder depositing liberty bonds which bank wrongfully converts, who later accepts certificate of deposit therefor, knowing bank to be insolvent is not protected. State ex rel. Spillman v. Atlas Bank of Neligh, 114 Neb. 650, 209 N.W. 334 (1926).Promissory note, secured by worthless third mortgage is not money or equivalent entitling deposit to priority, and subsequent holder of assigned certificate is not innocent purchaser. State ex rel. Davis v. Kilgore State Bank, 113 Neb. 772, 205 N.W. 297 (1925).Where officers of bank converted their stock into ostensible deposits by series of questionable transactions, claim was not entitled to priority. State ex rel. Davis v. Farmers State Bank of Winside, 112 Neb. 380, 199 N.W. 812 (1924).Where certificates of deposit are issued to officer to negotiate for replenishing cash reserve, and the bank receives nothing at time of issuance, the claim is not entitled to priority. State ex rel. Davis v. Farmers State Bank of Halsey, 111 Neb. 117, 196 N.W. 908 (1923).Where certificate of deposit is issued with understanding that bank will pay bonus in addition to statutory interest, the transaction amounts to a loan of funds not entitled to priority of payment. Iams v. Farmers State Bank, 101 Neb. 778, 165 N.W. 145 (1917).No preference or priority for the claims of the state against insolvent banks is provided except claims for taxes. City of Lincoln, Neb. v. Ricketts, 84 F.2d 795 (8th Cir. 1936).3. Trust fundFund created by delivery of notes by stockholders to bank to cover contingent reserve was an asset of bank upon which the statutory lien of this section attached upon closing of bank, and was not a trust fund reclaimable by the stockholders. Jorgenson v. Department of Banking, 136 Neb. 1, 284 N.W. 747 (1939).Basis for giving trust fund priority over depositors under this section is that trust fund does not constitute assets of the bank, but is really property of the claimant held by the bank as trustee. State ex rel. Sorensen v. Citizens Bank of Stuart, 124 Neb. 575, 248 N.W. 82 (1933).Statute is not applicable to claim based upon trust fund unlawfully converted by bank as trustee. State ex rel. Sorensen v. Farmers State Bank of Polk, 121 Neb. 532, 237 N.W. 857 (1931), 82 A.L.R. 7 (1931).4. MiscellaneousContract for liquidation of bank did not violate this section. Department of Banking v. Walker, 131 Neb. 732, 269 N.W. 907 (1936).Statute does not apply to fund unlawfully converted by the bank as trustee to its own use. State ex rel. Sorensen v. Citizens Bank of Stuart, 124 Neb. 717, 247 N.W. 427 (1933).Statutory lien hereunder does not foreclose constitutional powers of equity court to direct a disposition of bank assets in contravention thereof. State ex rel. Sorensen v. Nebraska State Bank, 124 Neb. 449, 247 N.W. 31 (1933).This section violates neither state constitutional prohibition of special and class legislation (Art. III, sec. 18) nor the 14th amendment to federal Constitution, equal protection clause. State ex rel. Sorensen v. First State Bank of Alliance, 122 Neb. 502, 240 N.W. 747 (1932), 79 A.L.R. 576 (1932).This section was intended to prevent state banks from securing deposits, by the pledging of assets, except in the cases specified where pledging is authorized. Bliss v. Pathfinder Irrigation District, 122 Neb. 203, 240 N.W. 291 (1932).Priority of unsecured deposits fixed by status at time of actual closing of bank when court adjudges it insolvent and orders liquidation. State ex rel. Sorensen v. Thurston State Bank, 121 Neb. 407, 237 N.W. 293 (1931).Under this and other sections cited, the Department of Banking is vested with general supervision and control of state banks with authority to do all things reasonably necessary for protection of depositors therein. Brownell v. Adams, 121 Neb. 304, 236 N.W. 750 (1931).This section gives to depositors of a failed bank a lien only on the assets of the bank. State ex rel. Spillman v. Citizens State Bank of Royal, 118 Neb. 337, 224 N.W. 868 (1929).This section is referred to as showing that some form of deposits was contemplated as an integral part of the business of banks. Gamble v. Daniel, 39 F.2d 451 (8th Cir. 1930), appeal dismissed 281 U.S. 705 (1930).
8-1,111
Insolvent banks; priority; not affected by federal deposit insurance.When a bank whose deposits are insured by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation becomes insolvent, neither the deposits therein nor the exchange thereof shall be deemed to be otherwise secured by reason of such insurance for purposes of section 8-1,110.
| Source | Laws 1935, c. 16, § 2, p. 91; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-1,102; R.S.1943, § 8-197; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 111, p. 181. |
8-1,112
Insolvent banks; Director of Banking and Finance; payment of dividends.At any time after the expiration of the date fixed for the presentation of claims, the district court may, upon the application of the director, by order authorize the director to declare out of the funds remaining in his hands, after the payment of expenses, one or more dividends, and at the earliest possible date the director shall declare a final dividend as may be directed by the district court of the county in which the principal office of such bank is located.
| Source | Laws 1933, c. 18, § 69, p. 170; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-1,133; R.S.1943, § 8-198; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 112, p. 181. |
This section does not constitute an unlawful delegation of judicial power to an executive department of government. Department of Banking v. Hedges, 136 Neb. 382, 286 N.W. 277 (1939).
8-1,113
Insolvent banks; liquidation expenses; allocation; certification.The director shall from time to time allocate to the various banks in liquidation the expenses of the department by reason of such liquidation, other than the compensation and expense of the special deputy or assistant in charge and the fees for legal services directly incident to the bank in liquidation, and certify to the various district courts of the counties in which the banks in process of liquidation are located the amount so allocated, which shall be taxed and paid as costs in the liquidation.
| Source | Laws 1933, c. 18, § 57, p. 164; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-1,128; R.S.1943, § 8-199; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 113, p. 181. |
8-1,114
Repealed. Laws 1973, LB 164,§25.
8-1,115
Insolvent banks; liquidation; reports to district court; dissolution of bank; cancellation of certificate and charter.The director shall from time to time make and file with the clerk of the district court of the county in which the insolvent bank is located, a report of his acts of liquidation of each insolvent bank. He shall, upon the completion of the liquidation, file a final report, notice of which shall be given as the court may direct, and on hearing thereon and approval thereof by the court such liquidation shall be declared closed and the corporation dissolved. The director shall then cancel the certificate and charter issued to such bank pursuant to sections 8-121 and 8-122.
| Source | Laws 1933, c. 18, § 68, p. 170; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-1,132; R.S.1943, § 8-1,101; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 115, p. 182. |
This section does not constitute an unlawful delegation of judicial power to an executive department of government. Department of Banking v. Hedges, 136 Neb. 382, 286 N.W. 277 (1939).
8-1,116
Insolvent banks; stockholders; restoration of solvency; conditions.After the department has taken possession of any bank under the Nebraska Banking Act, the stockholders thereof may repair its credit, restore or substitute its reserves, and otherwise place it in safe condition, but such bank shall not be permitted to reopen its business until the department, after careful investigation of its affairs, is of the opinion that its stockholders have complied with the law, that the bank's credit and funds are in all respects repaired, that its reserves are restored or are sufficiently substituted, and that it should be permitted again to reopen for business, whereupon the department may issue written permission for resumption of business under its charter.
| Source | Laws 1909, c. 10, § 50, p. 91; R.S.1913, § 330; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVI, § 51, p. 706; Laws 1921, c. 297, § 5, p. 951; C.S.1922, § 8031; C.S.1929, § 8-197; Laws 1931, c. 20, § 1, p. 92; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 61, p. 166; Laws 1941, c. 14, § 2, p. 93; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-197; R.S.1943, § 8-1,102; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 116, p. 182; Laws 1987, LB 2, § 18; Laws 1998, LB 1321, § 24. |
Under this section, power to assess fully paid-up capital stock of a state bank to recoup losses or to restore depleted capital was committed to the directors of the bank upon authority from the stockholders, and fund voluntarily raised by stockholders and used by a holding company in eliminating bad paper and maintaining reserve is not an assessment. State ex rel. Spillman v. Citizens State Bank of Chadron, 115 Neb. 776, 214 N.W. 933 (1927).Directors are not empowered to levy assessment where bank not taken over by Department of Banking, and stockholders have not authorized same. McMillan v. Chadron State Bank, 115 Neb. 767, 214 N.W. 931 (1927).Directors have power to levy assessment only where stockholders have exercised their option to repair capital, restore reserves, and continue business, rather than to liquidate. Citizens State Bank of Stratton v. Strayer, 114 Neb. 567, 208 N.W. 662 (1926).
8-1,117
Banks; impaired capital; assessments on stock to restore; preferred stock excepted.If the capital of a bank becomes impaired, whether the department shall or shall not have taken possession of the bank, whenever stockholders representing eighty-five percent or more of the common capital stock of the bank, with a view of restoring the impaired capital, shall with the approval of the department authorize the directors of the bank to levy and collect assessments on the common capital stock in such amount as they may determine necessary for such purpose, the directors shall levy the assessments so authorized and shall notify all common stockholders of record thereof by either registered or certified mail. If any common stockholder shall fail to pay his assessment within three weeks from the date of mailing such notice, the pro rata amount of such assessment shall be a lien upon his common capital stock, and the directors shall forthwith sell such shares of common capital stock at public or private sale without further notice and apply the proceeds thereof to the payment of such assessment, and the balance, if any, shall be paid to the delinquent shareholder. Nothing in this section shall be construed to authorize the levy and collections of assessments on the preferred capital stock of the bank.
| Source | Laws 1909, c. 10, § 50, p. 91; R.S.1913, § 330; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVI, § 51, p. 706; Laws 1921, c. 297, § 5, p. 951; C.S.1922, § 8031; C.S.1929, § 8-197; Laws 1931, c. 20, § 1, p. 92; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 61, p. 166; Laws 1941, c. 14, § 2, p. 93; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-197; R.S.1943, § 8-1,103; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 117, p. 182. |
8-1,118
Insolvent banks; restoration of solvency; reopening for limited business; conditions; costs; new deposits treated as a trust fund; expenses.If the director, with a view to restoring the solvency of any bank which the department has taken charge of pursuant to law, shall approve a contract or plan whereby the bank is permitted to receive deposits and pay checks and do a limited banking business, entered into between the unsecured depositors and unsecured creditors representing eighty-five percent or more of the total amount of deposits and unsecured claims of such bank on the one hand and the bank or its board of directors on the other, all other depositors and unsecured creditors shall be held subject to such agreement to the same extent and with the same effect as if they had joined in the execution thereof, and their claims shall be treated in all other respects as if they had joined in the execution of such agreement in the event such bank is permitted to reopen for business as limited by such contract. All deposits received after the adoption of such plan and the assets of the bank created thereby, and before the restoration of the bank to solvency, shall be a trust fund for the security and the repayment of the deposits so received and shall not be subject to the payment of any deposit, debt, claim, or demand of the bank previously created. Such money and assets shall be kept and invested in the manner directed by the director. Section 8-138 does not apply to banks operating under this section. Any county, city, village, township, or school district through its governing body, and the state through the Governor, may enter into such contract except when the funds of such county, city, village, township, or school district are adequately secured. Whenever a bank is permitted to operate under the provisions of this section, such bank shall pay all costs incurred by the department in the approval of such plan, including examiners' expenses, attorneys' fees, and clerk hire, and incurred in special examinations required by the director.
| Source | Laws 1933, c. 16, § 1, p. 128; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-1,121; R.S.1943, § 8-1,110; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 118, p. 183; Laws 2003, LB 217, § 8. |
Judicial notice taken of general condition existing which, by this act, was sought to be remedied. State ex rel. Nebraska State Bar Assn. v. Bachelor, 139 Neb. 253, 297 N.W. 138 (1941).Approval of plan of restricted operation does not restrict right of Department of Banking to liquidate insolvent bank. Farmers State Bank of Clarks v. Luikart, 131 Neb. 692, 269 N.W. 627 (1936).Status of claim of sureties for village deposit made in bank prior to being allowed to reopen for a limited banking business under this section discussed. Shumway v. Department of Banking, 131 Neb. 246, 267 N.W. 469 (1936).
8-1,119
Violations; general penalty.Where no other punishment is provided in the Nebraska Banking Act, any person violating any of the provisions of the act shall be guilty of a Class III misdemeanor.
| Source | Laws 1909, c. 10, § 61, p. 95; R.S.1913, § 341; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVI, § 61, p. 710; C.S.1922, § 8041; C.S.1929, § 8-1,104; R.S.1943, § 8-1,107; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 119, p. 184; Laws 1977, LB 40, § 53; Laws 1987, LB 2, § 19; Laws 1998, LB 1321, § 25. |
8-1,120
Violators; apprehension and conviction; rewards.The department may offer and pay out of the funds appropriated to it rewards for the apprehension and conviction of any person or persons violating the Nebraska Banking Act, but such rewards shall not exceed two hundred fifty dollars in any one case.
| Source | Laws 1909, c. 10, § 60, p. 95; R.S.1913, § 340; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVI, § 60, p. 710; C.S.1922, § 8040; C.S.1929, § 8-1,103; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 70, p. 170; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-1,103; R.S.1943, § 8-1,108; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 120, p. 184; Laws 1987, LB 2, § 20; Laws 1998, LB 1321, § 26. |
8-1,121
Fugitive violators; rewards.If any person against whom has been entered any indictment, complaint, or information charging a violation of the statutes of this state relating to banks and banking, which charged violation is a felony, shall be a fugitive from justice, the county attorney of the county wherein such indictment, complaint, or information was entered, shall promptly inform the Governor of the fact, and the Governor may thereupon make public proclamation that a reward of not more than twenty-five hundred dollars will be paid for information resulting in the apprehension of such fugitive. Such reward shall not be paid unless the fugitive is finally convicted of the violation charged by such indictment, complaint, or information, or of some similar violation growing out of the same transaction or out of his connection with the same bank, nor until such conviction shall become final. Upon the finality of such conviction, the county attorney shall certify the fact to the Governor, designating the person or persons entitled to any such reward. Thereupon the Governor shall order the Director of Administrative Services to draw his warrant for the amount of such reward payable to the person or persons entitled thereto, which warrant shall be drawn upon any money in the General Fund of the state treasury not otherwise appropriated, and the State Treasurer shall pay all such warrants.
| Source | Laws 1929, c. 42, § 1, p. 184; C.S.1929, § 8-1,119; R.S.1943, § 8-1,109; Laws 1963, c. 29, § 121, p. 185. |
8-1,122
Repealed. Laws 1987, LB 2,§22.
8-1,123
Repealed. Laws 2007, LB 124, § 77.
8-1,124
Emergencies; terms, defined.As used in sections 8-1,124 to 8-1,129, unless the context otherwise requires:
(1) Director shall mean the Director of Banking and Finance;
(2) Bank shall mean commercial banks, or any office or facility thereof, and, to the extent that the provisions of sections 8-1,124 to 8-1,129 are not inconsistent with and do not infringe upon paramount federal law, national banks;
(3) Officers shall mean the person or persons designated by the board of directors, board of trustees, or other governing body of a bank, to act for such bank to carry out the provisions of sections 8-1,124 to 8-1,129 or, in the absence of any such designation or of such officer or officers, the president or any other officer in charge of such bank or of such office or offices;
(4) Office shall mean any place at which a bank transacts its business or conducts operations related to its business; and
(5) Emergency shall mean any condition or occurrence which may interfere physically with the conduct of normal business operations at one or more or all of the offices of a bank, or which poses an imminent or existing threat to the safety or security of persons or property, or both, including but not limited to fire, flood, earthquake, hurricanes, wind, rain, snow storms, labor disputes and strikes, power failures, transportation failures, interruption of communication facilities, shortages of fuel, housing, food, transportation or labor, robbery or attempted robbery, actual or threatened enemy attack, epidemics or other catastrophes, riots, civil commotions, and other acts of lawlessness or violence, actual or threatened.
| Source | Laws 1971, LB 523, § 1. |
8-1,125
Emergencies; proclamation; Director of Banking and Finance; effect.Whenever the director is of the opinion that an emergency exists, or is impending, in this state or in any part of this state, he may, by proclamation, authorize any bank located in such affected area to close any or all of its offices. In addition, if the director is of the opinion that an emergency exists, or is impending, which affects, or may affect, a particular bank, or a particular office thereof, but not banks located in the area generally, he may authorize the particular bank or office so affected to close. Any office so closed shall remain closed until the director proclaims that the emergency has ended, or until such time as the officers of the bank determine that one or more offices, theretofore closed because of the emergency, should reopen, whichever occurs first, and, in either event, for such further time thereafter as may reasonably be required to reopen.
| Source | Laws 1971, LB 523, § 2. |
8-1,126
Emergencies; officers; powers.Whenever the officers of a bank are of the opinion that an emergency exists, or is impending, which affects, or may affect, one or more or all of a bank's offices, they shall have the authority, in the reasonable and proper exercise of their discretion, to determine not to open any one or more or all of such offices on any business or banking day or, if having opened, to close any one or more or all of such offices during the continuation of such emergency, even if the director has not issued and does not issue a proclamation of emergency. Any such closed office may remain closed until such time as the officers determine that the emergency has ended, and for such further time thereafter as may reasonably be required to reopen; Provided, in no case shall such office remain closed for more than forty-eight consecutive hours, excluding other legal holidays, without requesting the approval of the director.
| Source | Laws 1971, LB 523, § 3. |
8-1,127
Emergency; proclamation; President of United States; Governor; effect.The officers of a bank may close any one or all of the bank's offices on any day, designated by proclamation of the President of the United States or the Governor, as a day or days of mourning, rejoicing, or other special observance.
| Source | Laws 1971, LB 523, § 4. |
8-1,128
Emergency; closing; notice; contents.A bank closing an office pursuant to the authority granted under section 8-1,126 shall give as prompt notice of its action as conditions will permit and by any means available, to the director, or in the case of a national bank, to the Comptroller of the Currency.
| Source | Laws 1971, LB 523, § 5. |
8-1,129
Emergencies; laws applicable.Any day on which a bank, or any one or more of its offices, is closed during all or any part of its normal banking hours pursuant to the authorization granted under sections 8-1,124 to 8-1,129 shall be, with respect to such bank or, if not all of its offices are closed, with respect to any office or offices which are closed, a legal holiday for all purposes with respect to any banking business of any character. No liability, or loss of rights of any kind, on the part of any bank, or director, officer, or employee thereof, shall accrue or result by virtue of any closing authorized by sections 8-1,124 to 8-1,129.
The provisions of sections 8-1,124 to 8-1,129 shall be construed and applied as being in addition to, and not in substitution for or limitation of, any other law of this state or of the United States authorizing the closing of a bank or excusing delay by a bank in the performance of its duties and obligations because of emergencies or conditions beyond its control or otherwise.
| Source | Laws 1971, LB 523, § 6. |
Cross Reference
Bank holidays, see sections 62-301 and 62-301.01.
8-1,130
Investments in savings accounts in name of fiduciary; open account; withdrawal; death of fiduciary; effect.Any bank, building and loan association, or savings and loan association may accept investments in savings accounts or shares in the name of any administrator, personal representative, custodian, conservator, guardian, trustee, or other fiduciary for a named beneficiary or beneficiaries. Any such fiduciary shall have the power to open, make additions to, and withdraw any such account, in whole or in part, or to purchase such shares, purchase additional shares, or sell all or any part of such shares, and any such fiduciary who is the owner of shares shall have power to vote as a member as if the membership were held absolutely. The withdrawal value of any such account or shares, and earnings thereon, or other rights relating thereto may be paid or delivered, in whole or in part, to such fiduciary without regard to any notice to the contrary as long as such fiduciary is living. The payment or delivery to any such fiduciary or a receipt or acquittance signed by any such fiduciary to whom any such payment or any such delivery of right is made shall be a valid and sufficient release and discharge of the bank or association for the payment or delivery so made. Whenever a person holding an account or shares in a fiduciary capacity dies and no written notice of the revocation or termination of the fiduciary relationship has been given to the bank or association and the bank or association has no written notice of any other disposition of the beneficial estate, the withdrawal value of such account or shares, and earnings thereon, or other rights relating thereto may, at the option of the bank or association, be paid or delivered, in whole or in part, to the beneficiary or beneficiaries. Whenever an account or share shall be designated by any person describing himself or herself in opening such account or acquiring such share as trustee for another and no other or further notice of the existence and terms of a legal and valid trust than such description has been given in writing to the bank or association, or whenever an account is opened or shares are acquired specifically designated as a trust account or share held in trust and which contains a trust agreement as a part thereof, in the event of the death of the person so described as trustee, the withdrawal value of such account or shares or any part thereof, together with the earnings thereon, may be paid to the person for whom the account or shares are so described. The payment or delivery to any such beneficiary, beneficiaries, or designated person or a receipt or acquittance signed by any such beneficiary, beneficiaries, or designated person for any such payment or delivery shall be a valid and sufficient release and discharge of the bank or association for the payment or delivery so made. No bank or association paying any such fiduciary, beneficiary, or designated person in accordance with this section shall thereby be liable for any estate, inheritance, or succession taxes which may be due this state.
| Source | Laws 1974, LB 912, § 1; Laws 1986, LB 909, § 2. |
8-1,131
Retirement plan, medical savings account, or health savings account, investments; bank as trustee or custodian; powers and duties; account, how treated.(1) All banks chartered under the laws of Nebraska are qualified to act as trustee or custodian within the provisions of the federal Self-Employed Individuals Tax Retirement Act of 1962, as amended, or under the terms and provisions of section 408(a) of the Internal Revenue Code, if the provisions of such retirement plan require the funds of such trust or custodianship to be invested exclusively in shares or accounts in the bank or in other banks. If any such retirement plan, within the judgment of the bank, constitutes a qualified plan under the federal Self-Employed Individuals Tax Retirement Act of 1962, or under the terms and provisions of section 408(a) of the Internal Revenue Code and the regulations promulgated thereunder at the time the trust was established and accepted by the bank, and is subsequently determined not to be such a qualified plan or subsequently ceases to be such a qualified plan, in whole or in part, the bank may continue to act as trustee of any deposits theretofore made under such plan and to dispose of the same in accordance with the directions of the member and beneficiaries thereof. No bank, in respect to savings made under this subsection, shall be required to segregate such savings from other liabilities of the bank. The bank shall keep appropriate records showing in proper detail all transactions engaged in under the authority of this subsection.
(2)(a) All banks chartered under the laws of Nebraska are qualified to act as trustee or custodian of a medical savings account created within the provisions of section 220 of the Internal Revenue Code and a health savings account created within the provisions of section 223 of the Internal Revenue Code. If any such medical savings account or health savings account, within the judgment of the bank, constitutes a medical savings account under section 220 of the Internal Revenue Code or a health savings account under section 223 of the Internal Revenue Code and the regulations promulgated thereunder at the time the trust was established and accepted by the bank, and is subsequently determined not to be such a medical savings account or health savings account, in whole or in part, the bank may continue to act as trustee of any deposits theretofore made under such plan and to dispose of the same in accordance with the directions of the account holder. No bank, in respect to savings made under this subsection, shall be required to segregate such savings from other liabilities of the bank. The bank shall keep appropriate records showing in proper detail all transactions engaged in under the authority of this subsection.
(b) Except for judgments against the medical savings account holder or health savings account holder or his or her dependents for qualified medical expenses as defined under section 223(d)(2) of the Internal Revenue Code, funds credited to a medical savings account or health savings account below twenty-five thousand dollars are not susceptible to levy, execution, judgment, or other operation of law, garnishment, or other judicial enforcement and are not an asset or property of the account holder for purposes of bankruptcy law.
| Source | Laws 1975, LB 208, § 1; Laws 1995, LB 574, § 2; Laws 1997, LB 753, § 1; Laws 1999, LB 396, § 11; Laws 2005, LB 465, § 1. |
8-1,132
Repealed. Laws 1987, LB 2,§22.
8-1,133
Bank; business of leasing personal property; subject to rules and regulations.Any bank may engage, directly or indirectly, in the business of leasing personal property subject to rules and regulations of the Department of Banking and Finance.
| Source | Laws 1977, LB 506, § 1. |
8-1,134
Violations; director; powers; fines; notice; hearing; closure; emergency powers; service; procedures.(1) Whenever the Director of Banking and Finance has reason to believe that a violation of any provision of Chapter 8 or of the Credit Union Act or any rule, regulation, or order of the Department of Banking and Finance has occurred, he or she may cause a written complaint to be served upon the alleged violator. The complaint shall specify the statutory provision or rule, regulation, or order alleged to have been violated and the facts alleged to constitute a violation thereof and shall order that necessary corrective action be taken within a reasonable time to be prescribed in such order. Any such order shall become final as to any person named in the order unless such person requests, in writing, a hearing before the director no later than ten days after the date such order is served. In lieu of such order, the director may require that the alleged violator appear before the director at a time and place specified in the notice and answer the charge complained of. The notice shall be delivered to the alleged violator or violators in accordance with subsection (4) of this section not less than ten days before the time set for the hearing.
(2) The director shall provide an opportunity for a fair hearing to the alleged violator at the time and place specified in the notice or any modification of the notice. On the basis of the evidence produced at the hearing, the director shall make findings of fact and conclusions of law and enter such order as in his or her opinion will best further the purposes of Chapter 8 or the Credit Union Act and the rules, regulations, and orders of the department. Written notice of such order shall be given to the alleged violator and to any other person who appeared at the hearing and made written request for notice of the order. If the hearing is held before any person other than the director, such person shall transmit a record of the hearing together with findings of fact and conclusions of law to the director. The director, prior to entering his or her order on the basis of such record, shall provide opportunity to the parties to submit for his or her consideration exceptions to the findings or conclusions and supporting reasons for such exceptions. The order of the director shall become final and binding on all parties unless appealed to the district court of Lancaster County as provided in section 8-1,135. As part of such order, the director may impose a fine, in addition to the costs of the investigation, upon a person found to have violated any provision of Chapter 8, the Credit Union Act, or the rules, regulations, or orders of the department. The fine shall not exceed ten thousand dollars per violation for the first offense and twenty-five thousand dollars per violation for a second or subsequent offense involving a violation of the same provision of Chapter 8, the Credit Union Act, the rules and regulations of the department, or the same order of the department. The fines and costs shall be in addition to all other penalties imposed by the laws of this state, shall be collected by the director, and shall be remitted to the State Treasurer. Costs shall be credited to the Financial Institution Assessment Cash Fund, and fines shall be credited to the permanent school fund. If a person fails to pay the fine or costs of the investigation, a lien in the amount of the fine and costs shall be imposed upon all of the assets and property of such person in this state and may be recovered by suit by the director. The lien shall attach to the real property of such person when notice of the lien is filed and indexed against the real property in the office of the register of deeds in the county where the real property is located. The lien shall attach to any other property of such person when notice of the lien is filed against the property in the manner prescribed by law.
(3) Whenever the director finds that an emergency exists requiring immediate action to protect the safety and soundness of the institutions under the supervision and control of the department, the director may, without notice or hearing, issue an order reciting the existence of an emergency and requiring that such action be taken as the director deems necessary to meet the emergency. Notwithstanding the provisions of subsection (2) of this section, the order shall be effective immediately. Any person to whom such order is directed shall comply immediately, but on application to the director shall be afforded a hearing as soon as possible and not later than ten days after such application by the affected person. On the basis of the hearing, the director shall continue the order in effect, revoke it, or modify it. This subsection shall not apply to a determination of necessary acquisition made by the department pursuant to sections 8-1506 to 8-1510.
(4) Except as otherwise expressly provided, any notice, order, or other instrument issued by or under authority of the director shall be served on any person affected thereby either personally or by certified mail, return receipt requested. Proof of service shall be filed in the office of the director.
Every certificate or affidavit of service made and filed as provided in this subsection shall be prima facie evidence of the facts stated in the certificate or affidavit, and a certified copy shall have the same force and effect as the original.
(5) Any hearing provided for in this section may be conducted by the director, or by any member of the department acting in his or her behalf, or the director may designate hearing officers who shall have the power and authority to conduct such hearings in the name of the director at any time and place. A verbatim record of the proceedings of such hearings shall be taken and filed with the director, together with findings of fact and conclusions of law made by the director or hearing officer. The director may subpoena witnesses, and any witness who is subpoenaed shall receive the same fees as in civil actions in the district court and mileage as provided in section 81-1176. In case of contumacy or refusal to obey a notice of hearing or subpoena issued under this section, the district court of Lancaster County shall have jurisdiction, upon application of the director, to issue an order requiring such person to appear and testify or produce evidence as the case may require. Failure to obey such order of the court may be punished by such court as contempt.
If requested to do so by any party concerned with such hearing, the full stenographic notes, or tapes of an electronic transcribing device, of the testimony presented at such hearing shall be taken and filed. The stenographer shall, upon the payment of the stenographer's fee allowed by the court, furnish a certified transcript of all or any part of the stenographer's notes to any party to the action requiring and requesting such notes.
(6) The director may close to the public the hearing, or any portion of the hearing, provided for in this section when he or she finds that the closure is (a) necessary to protect any person, or any financial institution or entity under the department's jurisdiction, against unwarranted injury or (b) in the public interest. The director shall close no more of the public hearing than is necessary to attain the objectives of this subsection.
| Source | Laws 1984, LB 1039, § 1; Laws 1986, LB 908, § 1; Laws 1996, LB 948, § 118; Laws 1996, LB 1053, § 6; Laws 1997, LB 137, § 8. |
Cross Reference
Credit Union Act, see section 21-1701.
Financial Institution Assessment Cash Fund, purposes, see sections 8-601 and 8-604.
8-1,135
Appeal; procedure.Any person aggrieved by a final order of the Director of Banking and Finance made pursuant to section 8-1,134 may appeal the order, and the appeal shall be in accordance with the Administrative Procedure Act.
| Source | Laws 1984, LB 1039, § 2; Laws 1988, LB 352, § 10. |
Cross Reference
Administrative Procedure Act, see section 84-920.
8-1,136
Action to enjoin and enforce compliance.Whenever it appears to the Director of Banking and Finance that any person has engaged or is about to engage in any act or practice constituting a violation of any provision of Chapter 8 or the Credit Union Act, he or she may bring an action in the name of the director and the Department of Banking and Finance in any court of competent jurisdiction to enjoin any such acts or practices and to enforce compliance with the provisions of Chapter 8 or the Credit Union Act. Upon a proper showing, a permanent or temporary injunction, restraining order, or writ of mandamus shall be granted and a receiver or conservator may be appointed for the defendant's assets. The director shall not be required to post a bond.
| Source | Laws 1984, LB 1039, § 3; Laws 1986, LB 908, § 2; Laws 1996, LB 948, § 119. |
Cross Reference
Credit Union Act, see section 21-1701.
8-1,137
Evidence of violation; refer to prosecuting attorney.The Director of Banking and Finance may refer such evidence as may be available concerning violations of the Nebraska Criminal Code or of any rule, regulation, or order under Chapter 8 or under the Credit Union Act to the Attorney General or the proper county attorney. It shall be the duty of each county attorney or the Attorney General to whom the director reports a violation to cause appropriate proceedings to be instituted without delay.
| Source | Laws 1984, LB 1039, § 4; Laws 1986, LB 908, § 3; Laws 1996, LB 948, § 120. |
Cross Reference
Credit Union Act, see section 21-1701.
Nebraska Criminal Code, see sections 28-101 to 28-1350.
8-1,138
Violation of final order; liability; penalty.Any person who violates any of the provisions of a final order issued by the Director of Banking and Finance shall be liable to any person or entity who suffers damage proximately caused by such violation. Any person who knowingly violates any final order issued by the Director of Banking and Finance pursuant to section 8-1,134 shall be guilty of a Class I misdemeanor.
| Source | Laws 1984, LB 1039, § 5. |
8-1,139
Misapplication of funds or assets; penalty.An officer, director, agent, or employee of a bank, trust company, building and loan association, cooperative credit union, credit union, or other similar entity which is licensed, regulated, or examined by the Department of Banking and Finance who willfully misapplies any of the money, funds, or credits of any such entity or any money, funds, assets, or securities entrusted to the care or custody of such entity or the custody or care of any such officer, director, agent, or employee shall be guilty of a Class IV felony.
| Source | Laws 1984, LB 1039, § 6; Laws 2003, LB 131, § 5. |
8-1,140
Federally chartered
bank; bank organized under laws of Nebraska; rights, privileges, benefits,
and immunities; exception.Notwithstanding any
of the other provisions of the Nebraska Banking Act or any other Nebraska
statute, any bank incorporated under the laws of this state and organized
under the provisions of the act, or under the laws of this state as they existed
prior to May 9, 1933, shall directly, or indirectly through a subsidiary or
subsidiaries, have all the rights, powers, privileges, benefits, and immunities
which may be exercised as of April
9, 2009, by a federally chartered bank doing business
in Nebraska, including the exercise of all powers and activities that are
permitted for a financial subsidiary of a federally chartered bank. Such rights,
powers, privileges, benefits, and immunities shall not relieve such bank from
payment of state taxes assessed under any applicable laws of this state.
| Source | Laws 1999, LB 396, § 5; Laws 2000, LB 932, § 4; Laws 2001, LB 53, § 2; Laws 2002, LB 957, § 7; Laws 2003, LB 217, § 9; Laws 2004, LB 999, § 3; Laws 2005, LB 533, § 11; Laws 2006, LB 876, § 12; Laws 2007, LB124, § 6; Laws 2008, LB851, § 7; Laws 2009, LB327, § 6.April 9, 2009 |
8-201
Charter required; exception; powers of Department of Banking and Finance; rules and regulations; fee.The Director of Banking and Finance shall have the power to issue to corporations desiring to transact business as trust companies charters of authority to transact trust company business as defined in the Nebraska Trust Company Act. He or she shall have general supervision and control over such trust companies. Any three or more persons may adopt articles of incorporation and become a body corporate for the purpose of engaging in and conducting the business of a trust company, upon complying with the requirements of the act and the general laws of this state relating to the organization of corporations and upon obtaining a charter to transact business as a trust company from the director.
Every corporation organized for and desiring to transact a trust company business shall, before commencing such business, make under oath and transmit to the Department of Banking and Finance a complete statement including:
(1) The name of the proposed trust company;
(2) A certified copy of the articles of incorporation;
(3) The names of the stockholders;
(4) The name of the county, city, or village in which the trust company is located;
(5) The amount of paid-up capital stock; and
(6) A statement sworn to by the president and secretary that the capital stock has been paid in as provided for.
The corporation shall also pay the fee prescribed by section 8-602 for investigation of such statement.
If upon investigation the department is satisfied that the parties requesting the charter are parties of integrity and responsibility, that the corporation will apply safe and sound methods for the purpose of carrying out trust company duties, and that the public necessity, convenience, and advantage will be promoted by permitting the corporation to transact business as a trust company, the department shall issue to the corporation a charter entitling it to transact the business provided for in the act. Upon payment of the required fees, the pledging of assets required by section 8-209, and the receipt of the charter, the corporation may begin to transact business as a trust company. It shall be unlawful for any corporation, except a foreign corporate trustee to the extent authorized under section 30-3820, to engage in business as a trust company or to act in any other fiduciary capacity unless it has first obtained from the Department of Banking and Finance a charter of authority to do business.
The Department of Banking and Finance may adopt and promulgate rules and regulations to carry out the governance of trust companies under its supervision.
| Source | Laws 1911, c. 31, § 1, p. 187; R.S.1913, § 738; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVIII, § 1, p. 718; C.S.1922, § 8063; Laws 1927, c. 35, § 1, p. 159; C.S.1929, § 8-201; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 73, p. 171; Laws 1937, c. 20, § 3, p. 130; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-201; R.S.1943, § 8-201; Laws 1957, c. 10, § 2, p. 129; Laws 1975, LB 481, § 1; Laws 1993, LB 81, § 14; Laws 1998, LB 1321, § 33; Laws 2003, LB 130, § 111. |
Corporations organized under this article were empowered to accept and execute trusts and to discharge the duties imposed thereby. First Trust Company v. Airedale Ranch & Cattle Company, 136 Neb. 521, 286 N.W. 766 (1939).The officers of a trust company are responsible for the fraudulent acts of the corporation in which they participate. Wells v. Carlsen, 130 Neb. 773, 266 N.W. 618 (1936).Contract of trust company for handling and payment of life insurance premiums did not create trust relationship. Crancer v. Reichenbach, 130 Neb. 645, 266 N.W. 57 (1936).Individuals who are permitted to create trust companies to handle other people's money must use the same fidelity that one uses in his own business to see that the trust company does not defraud the public. Masonic Bldg. Corporation v. Carlsen, 128 Neb. 108, 258 N.W. 44 (1934).Trust company organized under state law is not "banking corporation" within meaning of state law or of bankruptcy law, and is subject to bankruptcy. Gamble v. Daniel, 39 F.2d 447 (8th Cir. 1930), appeal dismissed 281 U.S. 705 (1930).
8-201.01
Act, how cited.Sections 8-201 to 8-235 shall be known and may be cited as the Nebraska Trust Company Act.
| Source | Laws 1998, LB 1321, § 34. |
8-202
Articles of incorporation; filing.The articles of incorporation shall be filed in the office of the Secretary of State, and a certified copy shall be filed and recorded in the office of the county clerk of the county in which the corporation has its principal office. Articles of incorporation and other records relating to the corporate existence of the trust company shall be maintained as a permanent record of the trust company.
| Source | Laws 1911, c. 31, § 2, p. 188; R.S.1913, p. 739; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVIII, § 2, p. 718; C.S.1922, § 8064; C.S.1929, § 8-202; R.S.1943, § 8-202; Laws 1993, LB 81, § 15. |
8-203
General powers.The trust company shall have power:
(1) To have a corporate name;
(2) To have a corporate seal;
(3) To sue and be sued and complain and defend in all courts of law and equity;
(4) To receive reasonable compensation for all services performed by it under the Nebraska Trust Company Act;
(5) To make bylaws not inconsistent with the act or its articles of incorporation for the management of its affairs; and
(6) To appoint or elect such officers and agents as the business of the corporation may require.
| Source | Laws 1911, c. 31, § 2, p. 188; R.S.1913, § 740; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVIII, § 4, p. 718; C.S.1922, § 8065; C.S.1929, § 8-203; R.S.1943, § 8-203; Laws 1993, LB 81, § 16; Laws 1998, LB 1321, § 35. |
8-204
Directors; qualifications; duties; vacancies.The control of the business affairs of a trust company shall be vested in a board of directors of not less than five persons, all of whom shall be elected by and from its stockholders. Any vacancy on the board shall be filled within ninety days by appointment by the remaining directors, and any director so appointed shall serve until the next election of directors, except that if the vacancy leaves a minimum of five directors, appointment shall be optional. The board shall select from among its number a president and secretary and shall appoint trust officers and committees as it deems necessary. The officers and committee members shall hold their positions at the discretion of the board of directors. The board of directors shall hold at least one regular meeting in each calendar quarter and shall prepare and maintain complete and accurate minutes of the proceedings at such meetings.
The board of directors shall make or cause to be made each year a thorough examination of the books, records, funds, and securities held for the trust company and customer accounts. The examination may be conducted by the members of the board of directors or the board may accept an annual audit by an accountant or accounting firm approved by the Department of Banking and Finance. Any such examination or audit must comply in scope with minimum standards established by the department.
Unless the department otherwise approves, a majority of the members of the board of directors of any trust company shall be residents of this state. Reasonable efforts shall be made to acquire members of the board of directors from the county in which the trust company is located. Every director shall own at least one share of paid-up capital stock of the trust company or its holding company, if any, in his or her name and right. Directors of trust companies shall be persons of good moral character and known integrity, business experience, and responsibility. No person shall act as such member of the board of directors of any trust company until the corporation applies for and obtains approval from the Department of Banking and Finance.
| Source | Laws 1911, c. 31, § 4, p. 188; R.S.1913, § 741; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVIII, § 4, p. 718; C.S.1922, § 8065; C.S.1929, § 8-203; R.S.1943, § 8-204; Laws 1993, LB 81, § 17. |
Control of business of a trust company is vested under this section in the board of directors. First Trust Company v. Airedale Ranch & Cattle Company, 136 Neb. 521, 286 N.W. 766 (1939).
8-205
Capital stock; amount required; exception; impairment of capital stock; department; powers.(1) No corporation, except a bank authorized by the Director of Banking and Finance to operate a trust department, shall be authorized to transact business as a trust company under the Nebraska Trust Company Act on or after August 1, 2000, unless it has capital stock of at least five hundred thousand dollars, all of which shall be fully paid up in cash before the corporation is authorized to commence business.
(2)(a) Corporations, except a bank authorized to operate a trust department, authorized to transact business as a trust company under the act before August 1, 2000, shall, on or after such date, maintain a capital stock of at least two hundred thousand dollars in cities of one hundred thousand inhabitants or more, one hundred thousand dollars in cities of fifty thousand and less than one hundred thousand inhabitants, fifty thousand dollars in cities of more than ten thousand and less than fifty thousand inhabitants, and twenty-five thousand dollars in cities and villages having ten thousand inhabitants or less. The population of a city for purposes of this subsection shall be the population as determined by the most recent federal decennial census.
(b) A corporation, except a bank authorized to operate a trust department, authorized to transact business as a trust company under the act before August 1, 2000, subject to the capital stock requirement of subdivision (2)(a) of this section, which complies with the capital stock requirement of subsection (1) of this section, shall be subject to the capital stock requirement of subsection (1) of this section and shall maintain a capital stock of at least the minimum amount required by subsection (1) of this section.
(c) A corporation, except a bank authorized to operate a trust department, authorized to transact business as a trust company under the act before August 1, 2000, subject to the capital stock requirement of subdivision (2)(a) of this section, which complies with the capital stock requirement of a corporation located in a larger city pursuant to subdivision (2)(a) of this section, shall be subject to the capital stock requirement of such a corporation located in a larger city pursuant to subdivision (2)(a) of this section and shall maintain a capital stock of at least the minimum amount required for such a corporation located in a larger city pursuant to subdivision (2)(a) of this section.
(d) A capital stock requirement once attained by a corporation pursuant to either this subsection or subsection (1) of this section shall not be reduced.
(3) If at any time the department determines that the capital stock of a trust company is impaired, it may require the shareholders of the trust company to make up the capital stock impairment.
| Source | Laws 1911, c. 31, § 5, p. 188; R.S.1913, § 742; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVIII, § 5, p. 719; C.S.1922, § 8067; C.S.1929, § 8-205; R.S.1943, § 8-205; Laws 1959, c. 19, § 5, p. 144; Laws 1961, c. 14, § 8, p. 109; Laws 1993, LB 81, § 18; Laws 1998, LB 1321, § 36; Laws 2000, LB 932, § 5. |
8-205.01
Fidelity bond; requirements; director; powers and duties.Each trust company doing business under the Nebraska Trust Company Act shall obtain a fidelity bond, naming the trust company as obligee, in an amount to be fixed by the department. The bond shall be issued by an authorized insurer and shall be conditioned to protect and indemnify the trust company from loss of money or other personal property, including that for which the trust company is responsible, which it may sustain through or by reason of fraud, dishonesty, forgery, theft, embezzlement, wrongful abstraction, misapplication, misappropriation, or other dishonest or criminal act of or by any of its officers or employees. The bond may contain a deductible clause in an amount to be approved by the Director of Banking and Finance. An executed copy of the bond shall be filed with and approved by the director and shall remain a part of the records of the department. If the premium of the bond is not paid, the bond shall not be canceled or subject to cancellation unless at least ten days' advance notice, in writing, is filed with the department. No bond which is current with respect to premium payments shall be canceled or subject to cancellation unless at least forty-five days' advance notice, in writing, is filed with the department. The bond shall always be open to public inspection during the office hours of the department. In the event a bond is canceled, the department may take whatever action it deems appropriate in connection with the continued operation of the trust company involved.
| Source | Laws 1990, LB 956, § 5; Laws 1993, LB 81, § 19; Laws 1998, LB 1321, § 37. |
8-206
Specific powers.A trust company created under the Nebraska Trust Company Act shall have power:
(1) To receive trust funds for investment or in trust upon such terms and conditions as may be agreed upon and to purchase, hold, and lease fireproof and burglar-proof and other vaults and safes from which revenue may be derived;
(2) To accept and execute all such trusts as may be committed to it by any corporation, person, or persons, act as assignee, receiver, trustee, and depositor, and accept and execute all such trusts as may be committed or referred to it by order, judgment, or decree of any court of record;
(3) To take, accept, and hold by the order, judgment, or decree of any such court or by gift, grant, assignment, transfer, devise, or bequest any real or personal property in trust, to care for, manage, and convey the same in accordance with such trusts, and to execute and perform any and all such trusts;
(4) To act as attorney in fact for any person or corporation, public or private;
(5) To act either by itself or jointly with any natural person or persons or with any other trust company or state or national bank doing business in this state as administrator of the estate of any deceased person, as personal representative, or as conservator or guardian of the estate of any incapacitated person;
(6) To act as trustee for any person or of the estate of any deceased person under the appointment of any court of record having jurisdiction of the estate of such person;
(7) To act as agent or in an agency capacity for any person or entity, public or private;
(8) To loan money upon real estate and upon collateral security when the collateral would of itself be a legal investment for such corporation;
(9) To buy, hold, own, and sell securities issued or guaranteed by the United States Government or any authorized agency thereof, including any corporation or enterprise wholly owned directly or indirectly by the United States, or with the authority to borrow directly from the United States treasury, or securities secured by obligations of any of the foregoing, securities of any state or political subdivision thereof which possesses general powers of taxation, stock, warrants, bills of exchange, notes, mortgages, banker's acceptances, certificates of deposit in institutions whose accounts are insured by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, securities issued pursuant to the Nebraska Business Development Corporation Act, and other investment securities, negotiable and nonnegotiable, except stock or other securities of any corporation organized under the Nebraska Trust Company Act;
(10) To purchase, own, or rent real estate needed in the conduct of the business and to erect thereon buildings deemed expedient and necessary, the cost of such real estate and buildings not to exceed one hundred percent of the paid-up capital stock, and to purchase, own, and improve such other real estate as it may be required to bid in under foreclosure or in payment of other debts;
(11) To borrow money, to execute and issue its notes payable at a future date, and to pledge its real estate, mortgages, or other securities therefor. With the approval of the Director of Banking and Finance, any trust company may at any time, through action of its board of directors and without requiring any action of its stockholders, issue and sell its capital notes or debentures. Such capital notes or debentures shall be subordinate and subject to the claims of trustors and beneficiaries of estates and trusts and may be subordinated and subject to the claims of other creditors. The holders of such capital notes or debentures shall not be held individually responsible as such holders for any debts, contracts, or engagements of the trust company and shall not be held liable for assessments to restore impairments in the capital of the trust company as may be from time to time determined by the director; and
(12) To perform all acts and exercise all powers connected with, belonging to or incident to, or necessary for the full and complete exercise and discharge of the rights, powers, and responsibilities granted in the Nebraska Trust Company Act, and all provisions of the act shall be liberally construed. None of the powers hereby granted shall extend to or be construed to authorize any such corporation to accept deposits or conduct the business of banking as defined in the Nebraska Banking Act.
| Source | Laws 1911, c. 31, § 6, p. 189; R.S.1913, § 743; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVIII, § 6, p. 719; C.S.1922, § 8068; Laws 1927, c. 35, § 2, p. 160; C.S.1929, § 8-206; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 74, p. 172; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-206; R.S.1943, § 8-206; Laws 1959, c. 263, § 1, p. 919; Laws 1967, c. 22, § 1, p. 124; Laws 1986, LB 909, § 3; Laws 1986, LB 1177, § 1; Laws 1993, LB 81, § 20; Laws 1998, LB 1321, § 38; Laws 2005, LB 533, § 12. |
Cross Reference
Nebraska Banking Act, see section 8-101.01.
Nebraska Business Development Corporation Act, see section 21-2101.
A loan by a trust company to one of its managing officers is prohibited by this section. Burke v. Munger, 138 Neb. 74, 292 N.W. 53 (1940).Under this section, trust companies organized under this article were empowered to accept and execute trusts and to discharge the duties imposed thereby. First Trust Company v. Airedale Ranch & Cattle Company, 136 Neb. 521, 286 N.W. 766 (1939).In criminal prosecution of officer of trust company for embezzlement of trust funds, court properly instructed jury that trust company had no power to assent to a loan to one of its officers. Buckley v. State, 131 Neb. 752, 269 N.W. 892 (1936).Power of petitioner as trustee, upon the death of the insured, to accept and receive the proceeds of the life insurance policy payable to it as trustee, plainly conferred hereunder. Federal Trust Co. v. Damron, 124 Neb. 655, 247 N.W. 589 (1933).Under terms of debenture, trust company empowered, under subdivision 7 hereof, to substitute, for farm mortgages originally deposited with it, stocks, bonds, etc., and obligation fulfilled by safely holding same. Myers v. Union Nat. Bank of Fremont, 115 Neb. 49, 211 N.W. 343 (1926).Where the next of kin disagree as to who shall be appointed, county court has power to appoint duly authorized trust company as administrator. In re Estate of Anderson, 102 Neb. 170, 166 N.W. 261 (1918).
8-207
Appointment as fiduciary, authorized; oath.Courts of this state may appoint a trust company receiver, assignee, trustee, guardian, conservator, personal representative, custodian, or administrator. When a trust company is so appointed and an oath is required to be made, whether in order to qualify or for any other purpose, the president, vice president, secretary, or trust officer may, on behalf of the trust company, make and subscribe the required oath.
| Source | Laws 1911, c. 31, § 7, p. 191; R.S.1913, § 744; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVIII, § 7, p. 720; C.S.1922, § 8069; C.S.1929, § 8-207; R.S.1943, § 8-207; Laws 1947, c. 13, § 4, p. 78; Laws 1986, LB 909, § 4; Laws 1993, LB 81, § 21. |
8-207.01
Repealed. Laws 1988, LB 795, § 8.
8-208
Conveyances; execution.All conveyance of or other instruments affecting real estate owned or held in trust by a trust company shall be authorized, prior to or within ninety days after the conveyance or execution of an instrument affecting real estate owned or held in trust, by a resolution of the board of directors or a committee appointed by the board of directors and signed in the name of the trust company by its president or vice president.
| Source | Laws 1911, c. 31, § 8, p. 192; R.S.1913, § 745; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVIII, § 8, p. 721; C.S.1922, § 8070; C.S.1929, § 8-208; R.S.1943, § 8-208; Laws 1993, LB 81, § 22; Laws 2001, LB 53, § 3. |
8-209
Pledge of securities
with Department of Banking and Finance; amount required.(1) Any
corporation organized to do business as a trust company under the Nebraska
Trust Company Act shall make a pledge with the Department of Banking and Finance
of approved securities.
(2) The amount of securities required
to be pledged shall be based on the market value of trust assets held by the
trust company as follows:
(a) Trust companies
with trust assets with a market value of less than twenty-five million dollars
shall pledge securities in the amount of one hundred thousand dollars in par
value;
(b) Trust companies with trust assets with a market value of at
least twenty-five million dollars but less than two hundred fifty million
dollars shall pledge securities in the amount of two hundred thousand dollars
in par value;
(c) Trust companies with trust assets with a market value of at
least two hundred fifty million dollars but less than two billion five hundred
million dollars shall pledge securities in the amount of three hundred thousand
dollars in par value;
(d) Trust companies with trust assets with a market value of at
least two billion five hundred million dollars but less than five billion
dollars shall pledge securities in the amount of four hundred thousand dollars
in par value; and
(e) Trust companies with trust assets with a market value of five
billion dollars or more shall pledge securities in the amount of five hundred
thousand dollars in par value.
(3) A trust company shall determine the
market value of its trust assets at the end of each calendar year. If such
valuation shows that the pledge of securities is less than is required by
subsection (2) of this section, the trust company shall increase the amount
of the securities pledged with the department within sixty days following
the end of the calendar year.
(4) If at any time the market value of pledged
assets is determined to have depreciated to less than ninety percent of par
value or the trust company has trust funds deposited with itself or its supporting
commercial bank in excess of those deposits referred to by section 8-212,
the Director of Banking and Finance may require additional pledges in amounts
deemed necessary to fully secure pledging requirements or excessive trust
fund depository balances.
(5) Any
national bank authorized by the Office of the Comptroller of the Currency
or the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System to act in a fiduciary
capacity in this state, any federal savings association authorized by the
Director of the Office of Thrift Supervision to act in a fiduciary capacity
in this state, any federally chartered trust company, and any out-of-state
trust company authorized under the Interstate Trust Company Office Act shall
make similar pledges with the department, and all such deposits of national
banks held by the department shall be considered as having been lawfully so
pledged and subject to the Nebraska Trust Company Act.
| Source | Laws 1911, c. 31, § 9, p. 192; R.S.1913, § 746; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVIII, § 9, p. 721; C.S.1922, § 8071; C.S.1929, § 8-209; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 75, p. 174; Laws 1939, c. 3, § 1, p. 59; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-209; R.S.1943, § 8-209; Laws 1993, LB 81, § 23; Laws 1998, LB 1321, § 39; Laws 2009, LB327, § 7.August 30, 2009 |
Cross Reference
Interstate Trust Company Office Act, see section 8-2301.
8-210
Securities; kinds
authorized; pledge with Department of Banking and Finance.Securities pledged pursuant to section
8-209 shall consist of any securities which constitute a legal
investment for the trust company except for bills of exchange, notes, mortgages,
banker's acceptances, or certificates of deposit. State, county, municipal,
and corporate bond issues must be of investment quality and be rated in the
three top categories of investment by at least one nationally recognized rating
service, except that all issues of counties and municipalities of Nebraska
shall be acceptable.
Such securities shall not be accepted for purpose of pledge
at a rate above par value and if their market value is less than par value
they shall not be accepted for such purpose above their actual market value.
The safekeeping of such securities and all other expenses incidental to the
pledging of such securities shall be at the expense of the trust company.
| Source | Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVIII, § 10, p. 721; C.S.1922, § 8072; C.S.1929, § 8-210; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 76, p. 175; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-210; R.S.1943, § 8-210; Laws 1957, c. 13, § 1, p. 136; Laws 1959, c. 263, § 2, p. 922; Laws 1967, c. 23, § 1, p. 127; Laws 1993, LB 81, § 24; Laws 2009, LB327, § 8.August 30, 2009 |
8-211
Pledge of securities with Department of Banking and Finance; certificate of compliance; effect on obligation to furnish bond as fiduciary.The required pledges having been made, the Department of Banking and Finance shall issue a receipt and a certificate showing that the trust company has complied with the Nebraska Trust Company Act. Having thus qualified, the trust company may be permitted to act as assignee, receiver, trustee, either by appointment of court or under will, or depository of money in court without bond. Upon presentation of the certificate that the trust company has complied with the act and has made a pledge as provided in section 8-209, the court or other officer charged with the duty of making such appointment or of approving bonds may, in his or her discretion, make the appointment and permit the trust company to qualify without bond or require such bond as is required from natural persons.
| Source | Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVIII, § 11, p. 721; C.S.1922, § 8073; C.S.1929, § 8-211; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 77, p. 175; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-211; R.S.1943, § 8-211; Laws 1993, LB 81, § 25; Laws 1998, LB 1321, § 40. |
The fact that trust company has given general bond does not prevent county court from requiring another bond as testamentary trustee. In re Estate of Grainger, 151 Neb. 555, 38 N.W.2d 435 (1949).
8-212
Pledged securities; primarily liable for trust obligations and losses.Securities pledged as provided in section 8-209 shall be primarily liable for the obligations of the trust company, state or national bank, federal savings association, federally chartered trust company, or out-of-state trust company authorized under the Interstate Trust Company Office Act incurred while acting in any fiduciary capacity, for depository of money in court, and for losses arising from trust funds deposited with failed financial institutions in excess of deposit insurance limits and shall not be liable for any other debt or obligation of the trust company until all such trust liabilities have been discharged.
| Source | Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVIII, § 12, p. 722; C.S.1922, § 8074; C.S.1929, § 8-212; Laws 1933, c. 20, § 1, p. 190; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 78, p. 176; Laws 1939, c. 3, § 2, p. 60; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-212; R.S.1943, § 8-212; Laws 1993, LB 81, § 26; Laws 1998, LB 1321, § 41. |
Cross Reference
Interstate Trust Company Office Act, see section 8-2301.
8-213
Pledged securities of insolvent trust companies; transfer to fiduciary; conditions.In the case of national banks and federal savings associations doing business as trust companies, trust companies, federally chartered trust companies, and out-of-state trust companies authorized under the Interstate Trust Company Office Act which upon insolvency are not liquidated by the Department of Banking and Finance, upon the appointment of a receiver, trustee in bankruptcy, or other liquidating agent, the department shall turn over to the receiver, trustee in bankruptcy, or other liquidating agent any securities pledged to it by the national bank, federal savings association, trust company, federally chartered trust company, or out-of-state trust company authorized under the Interstate Trust Company Office Act upon:
(1) The entry of an order by a court having jurisdiction over a receiver, trustee in bankruptcy, or other liquidating agent of the national bank, federal savings association, trust company, federally chartered trust company, or out-of-state trust company authorized under the Interstate Trust Company Office Act ordering the department to turn over to a receiver, trustee in bankruptcy, or other liquidating agent the securities pledged to the department; and
(2) The publication of a notice for three successive weeks in some legal newspaper published in the county or, if none is published in the county, in a legal newspaper of general circulation in the county in which the principal place of business of the national bank, federal savings association, trust company, federally chartered trust company, or out-of-state trust company authorized under the Interstate Trust Company Office Act is located that all claims for the trust liabilities must be filed with the receiver, trustee in bankruptcy, or other liquidating agent within thirty days. In the case of national banks the notice provided for in 12 U.S.C. 193, and in the case of trust companies liquidated in bankruptcy court, the notice provided for in 11 U.S.C. 94(b), shall be sufficient without further notice being given and shall be in lieu of the notice required in this subdivision. In the case of out-of-state trust companies authorized under the Interstate Trust Company Office Act, an additional notice shall be published in each county in Nebraska where the out-of-state trust company maintains an office or maintained an office within one year prior to the insolvency.
| Source | Laws 1933, c. 20, § 1, p. 190; Laws 1939, c. 3, § 2, p. 60; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-212; R.S.1943, § 8-213; Laws 1986, LB 960, § 2; Laws 1993, LB 81, § 27; Laws 1998, LB 1321, § 42; Laws 2005, LB 533, § 13. |
Cross Reference
Interstate Trust Company Office Act, see section 8-2301.
8-214
Pledged securities; release upon surrender of fiduciary powers; conditions.Any national bank, federal savings association, federally chartered trust company, or out-of-state trust company authorized under the Interstate Trust Company Office Act which has surrendered its right to exercise such fiduciary powers in this state may have its pledged securities released to it upon furnishing to the Department of Banking and Finance a certificate by its primary financial institution regulator that such national bank, federal savings association, federally chartered trust company, or out-of-state trust company authorized under the Interstate Trust Company Office Act is no longer authorized to exercise such powers and has been relieved, in accordance with the laws of this state, of all duties and obligations as assignee, receiver, or trustee, either by appointment of court or under will, and for depository of money in court.
| Source | Laws 1939, c. 3, § 2, p. 60; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-212; R.S.1943, § 8-214; Laws 1993, LB 81, § 28; Laws 1998, LB 1321, § 43. |
Cross Reference
Interstate Trust Company Office Act, see section 8-2301.
8-215
Pledged securities; release upon liquidation; conditions.Any trust company, state or national bank or federal savings association with a trust department, federally chartered trust company, or out-of-state trust company authorized under the Interstate Trust Company Office Act doing business in this state, upon liquidating its business and affairs for reasons other than insolvency, may have its pledged securities released to it upon satisfying the Department of Banking and Finance that it has been lawfully relieved of all its duties and obligations as assignee, receiver, or trustee, either by appointment of court or under will, and for depository of money in court, after first having published notice three successive weeks in some legal newspaper published in the county or, if none is published in the county, in a legal newspaper of general circulation in the county in which the principal place of business of the trust company, trust department of a state or national bank or federal savings association, federally chartered trust company, or out-of-state trust company authorized under the Interstate Trust Company Office Act is located that all claims against such securities, whether absolute or contingent, must be filed with the department by a day certain, not less than thirty days after the last publication of such notice.
| Source | Laws 1939, c. 3, § 2, p. 61; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-212; R.S.1943, § 8-215; Laws 1986, LB 960, § 3; Laws 1993, LB 81, § 29; Laws 1998, LB 1321, § 44. |
Cross Reference
Interstate Trust Company Office Act, see section 8-2301.
Department of Banking, as liquidating agent for trust company by proceedings hereunder, is not "adverse holder", and is required to obey summary order to turn over property to bankruptcy receiver. Gamble v. Daniel, 39 F.2d 447 (8th Cir 1930), appeal dismissed 281 U.S. 705 (1930).
8-216
Pledged securities; interest; company's right to collect.The trust company may collect and retain the interest of all securities pledged as provided in section 8-209.
| Source | Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVIII, § 13, p. 722; C.S.1922, § 8075; C.S.1929, § 8-213; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 79, p. 176; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-213; R.S.1943, § 8-216; Laws 1993, LB 81, § 30. |
8-217
Pledged securities; substitute; when required.If the interest on any security pledged as provided in section 8-209 remains unpaid for thirty days after maturity, the trust company shall substitute other securities therefor.
| Source | Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVIII, § 14, p. 722; C.S.1922, § 8076; C.S.1929, § 8-214; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 80, p. 176; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-214; R.S.1943, § 8-217; Laws 1993, LB 81, § 31. |
8-218
Examination; powers and duties of Department of Banking and Finance.The Department of Banking and Finance or any duly appointed examiner authorized by it may make a full examination into all the books, papers, and affairs of any trust company doing business under the Nebraska Trust Company Act as often as deemed necessary. In so doing, the department shall have power to administer oaths and affirmations and to examine on oath or affirmation the officers, agents, and clerks of the trust company, touching the matter which they may be authorized to inquire into and examine, and to summon and by subpoena compel the attendance of any person or persons in this state to testify under oath in relation to the affairs of the trust company. In lieu of any examination authorized by the laws of this state, the Director of Banking and Finance may accept, in his or her discretion, a report of an examination made of a trust company by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, the Federal Reserve Bank, or the Office of Thrift Supervision or he or she may examine any such trust company jointly with any such federal agency.
| Source | Laws 1911, c. 31, § 9, p. 193; R.S.1913, § 747; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVIII, § 15, p. 722; C.S.1922, § 8077; Laws 1927, c. 35, § 3, p. 162; Laws 1929, c. 38, § 6, p. 158; C.S.1929, § 8-215; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 81, p. 176; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-215; R.S.1943, § 8-218; Laws 1993, LB 81, § 32; Laws 1998, LB 1321, § 45. |
8-218.01
Inactive company; charter revoked; when; release of assets.Any trust company which fails to exercise trust powers for three years or which voluntarily surrenders duties associated with fiduciary accounts so that no activity is reported for a period of three years, as determined by the consecutive annual reports submitted to the Department of Banking and Finance, shall be deemed inactive. Trust charters determined to be inactive as described in this section shall be revoked and the pledged assets released in accordance with section 8-215.
| Source | Laws 1993, LB 81, § 33. |
8-219
Liquidation; reorganization; adjudication of insolvency; grounds; powers and duties of Department of Banking and Finance.Whenever (1) it appears to the Department of Banking and Finance from any examination or report provided for by the Nebraska Trust Company Act that the capital stock of any trust company transacting business under the act is impaired, or that the trust company is conducting its business in an unsafe or unauthorized manner, or that the trust company is endangering the interest of the beneficiaries for whom it holds property in trust, (2) the officers or employees of the trust company refuse to submit its books, papers, and affairs to the inspection of any examiner, (3) any officer thereof refuses to be examined upon oath touching the affairs of the trust company, or (4) from any examination or report provided for by law, the department has reason to conclude that the trust company is in an unsafe or unsound condition to transact the business for which it is organized or that it is unsafe and inexpedient for it to continue its business, the department shall take charge of the trust company and proceed to reorganize or to liquidate the trust company in the manner provided for the liquidation of insolvent banks. If the trust company neglects or refuses to observe any lawful order of the department, then the department may cause a suit to be brought in the name of the State of Nebraska upon the relation of the Department of Banking and Finance against the trust company in the district court of the county in which the trust company is chartered for the purpose of having the trust company adjudged insolvent and its business wound up.
| Source | Laws 1927, c. 35, § 3, p. 163; Laws 1929, c. 38, § 6, p. 159; C.S.1929, § 8-215; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 81, p. 177; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-215; R.S.1943, § 8-219; Laws 1993, LB 81, § 34; Laws 1998, LB 1321, § 46. |
8-220
Liquidation; adjudication of insolvency; procedure; powers of district court; liens dissolved.The suit referred to in section 8-219 shall be conducted as a civil action under the laws of Nebraska. If in the suit the court finds that the trust company is insolvent, it shall enter a judgment of insolvency and order that the business of the trust company shall be wound up. The court or any judge thereof may, after notice to the trust company, enjoin the trust company from continuing to transact business pending the hearing and entry of a judgment in the case. If the court finds and adjudges that the trust company is insolvent, the Department of Banking and Finance shall thereupon become the liquidating agent to wind up the business of the trust company, and the department shall be vested with the title to all of the assets and the property of the trust company wherever such property may be situated and whatever the kind and character of the assets and property may be, as of the date of the filing of the petition in court. Any attachment lien against the property of the trust company, acquired within sixty days next preceding the filing of the suit, shall be thereby released and dissolved.
| Source | Laws 1927, c. 35, § 3, p. 163; Laws 1929, c. 38, § 6, p. 159; C.S.1929, § 8-215; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 81, p. 177; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-215; R.S.1943, § 8-220; Laws 1993, LB 81, § 35. |
8-221
Liquidation; insolvency; injunction to prevent transaction of business.If the judge of the district court of the county where the suit is filed is absent therefrom, any judge of the Court of Appeals or Supreme Court may grant the injunction as provided in section 8-220 with the same force and effect as if it had been granted by the district judge. All the proceedings for the conduct of the suit and an entry of judgment shall be conducted in the district court of the county where the trust company was chartered. If the trust company is adjudged insolvent, its affairs shall be wound up by the Department of Banking and Finance under and subject to the order of the district court in the manner provided in the case of insolvent banks.
| Source | Laws 1927, c. 35, § 3, p. 164; Laws 1929, c. 38, § 6, p. 160; C.S.1929, § 8-215; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 81, p. 178; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-215; R.S.1943, § 8-221; Laws 1991, LB 732, § 14; Laws 1993, LB 81, § 36. |
8-222
Maximum liability.The maximum liability which may be incurred by any trust company organized under the Nebraska Trust Company Act, exclusive of money or properties held in trust and exclusive of money borrowed for investment and actually invested in real estate mortgages and other securities in which trust companies are authorized to invest under the act, shall not exceed one hundred percent of the paid-up capital stock.
| Source | Laws 1911, c. 31, § 10, p. 194; R.S.1913, § 748; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVIII, § 16, p. 723; C.S.1922, § 8078; Laws 1923, c. 32, § 1, p. 142; C.S.1929, § 8-217; R.S.1943, § 8-222; Laws 1993, LB 81, § 37; Laws 1998, LB 1321, § 47. |
8-223
Statements required; when; annual report, defined; penalty.(1) The trust company shall file with the Department of Banking and Finance during the months of January and July of each year a statement under oath of the condition of the trust company on the last business day of the preceding December and June in the manner and form required by the department. For purposes of the Nebraska Trust Company Act, the trust company's annual report shall be deemed to be the report filed with the Department of Banking and Finance during the month of January.
(2) Any trust company that fails, neglects, or refuses to make or furnish any report or any published statement required by the Nebraska Trust Company Act shall pay to the department fifty dollars for each day such failure continues, unless the department extends the time for filing such report.
(3) The filing requirements of this section shall not apply to the trust department of a bank if the report of condition of the trust department is included in the reports of the bank required by the Nebraska Banking Act.
| Source | Laws 1911, c. 31, § 11, p. 194; R.S.1913, § 749; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVIII, § 17, p. 723; C.S.1922, § 8079; C.S.1929, § 8-218; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 82, p. 178; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-218; R.S.1943, § 8-223; Laws 1993, LB 81, § 38; Laws 1998, LB 1321, § 48; Laws 2000, LB 932, § 6; Laws 2008, LB851, § 8.July 18, 2008 |
Cross Reference
Nebraska Banking Act, see section 8-101.01.
8-224
Reports; form; publication; trust company; disclosure statement.(1) The reports required by section 8-223 shall be verified by one of the managing officers, and a summary of the annual report, in a form prescribed by the Department of Banking and Finance, shall, within thirty days after the filing of the statement with the department, be published in a newspaper of general circulation in the county where the trust company is chartered.
(2) The publication required by this section shall not apply to any trust company that makes an annual disclosure statement available to any member of the general public upon request in accordance with the following provisions:
(a) The annual disclosure statement shall be in a form prescribed by the department;
(b) In the lobby of its main office, in every branch trust office, and in every representative trust office, the trust company shall at all times display a notice that the annual disclosure statement may be obtained from the trust company;
(c) If the trust company maintains an Internet web site, the home page of the web site shall at all times contain a notice that the annual disclosure statement may be obtained from the trust company;
(d) The notice described in subdivisions (b) and (c) of this subsection shall include, at a minimum, an address and telephone number to which requests for an annual disclosure statement may be made;
(e) The first requested copy of the annual disclosure statement shall be provided to a requester free of charge; and
(f) A trust company shall make its annual disclosure statement available to the public beginning not later than the following March 31 or, if the trust company mails an annual disclosure statement to its shareholders, beginning not later than five days after the mailing of the disclosure statement, whichever occurs first. A trust company shall make its annual disclosure statement available continuously until (i) the annual disclosure statement for the succeeding year becomes available or (ii) a summary of its annual report is published for the succeeding year in accordance with this section.
(3) The publication required by this section shall not apply to reports of the trust department of a bank if the report of condition of the trust department is included in the reports of the bank required by the Nebraska Banking Act.
| Source | Laws 1911, c. 31, § 12, p. 194; R.S.1913, § 750; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVIII, § 18, p. 723; C.S.1922, § 8080; C.S.1929, § 8-219; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 83, p. 178; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-219; R.S.1943, § 8-224; Laws 1993, LB 81, § 39; Laws 1997, LB 137, § 9; Laws 2008, LB851, § 9.July 18, 2008 |
Cross Reference
Nebraska Banking Act, see section 8-101.01.
8-224.01
Prohibited acts; violation; penalties.(1) No charge shall be allowed against an estate or trust for legal services performed by an attorney who is a salaried employee of the trust company or when a portion of the charge for legal service is retained by the trust company. Any officer or employee of the trust company causing or consenting to such division of fee for legal service shall be guilty of a Class I misdemeanor. No investments of an estate or trust shall be made in the capital stock or securities of the trust company, in the stock or securities of its affiliated companies, or in obligations, either direct or indirect, of any director, officer, or employee of the trust company. The trust company shall not substitute any of the assets of an estate or trust under its control for securities of the trust company. A trust company may administer, in a fiduciary capacity, an estate or trust which contains such capital stock, securities, or obligations as part of its assets if such assets are received in kind from the grantor of the estate or trust and retention of such capital stock, securities, or obligations is properly authorized by the terms of the governing document. Any officer or employee of the trust company making such an investment or consenting to such an investment or causing such substitution or consenting to such substitution shall be guilty of a Class III felony.
(2) No loan of the assets of the trust company shall be made to any officer or director of such corporation. No trust company shall cause or allow funds of any account entrusted to the trust company to be loaned, directly or indirectly, to any director, officer, or employee of the trust company except when the director, officer, or employee has a specific beneficial interest in the account and such loans are allowed in governing account documents and are not prohibited by other state or federal law. Any director, officer, or employee of the trust company causing, consenting to, or receiving funds from a loan made in violation of this section shall be guilty of a Class III felony.
| Source | Laws 1993, LB 81, § 40; Laws 1993, LB 423, § 3. |
8-225
False statement or book entry; destruction or secretion of records; penalty.Any person who swears to any of the statements required by the Nebraska Trust Company Act, knowing them to be false, who subscribes to, makes, or causes to be made any false statement or false entry in the books of any trust company transacting a business under the act, who subscribes to or exhibits false papers or fails to make true and correct entry in the books and records of the trust company of its business and transactions in the manner and form prescribed by the Department of Banking and Finance, who mutilates, alters, destroys, secretes, or removes any of the books or records of the trust company without the written consent of the Director of Banking and Finance, or who makes, states, or publishes any false statement of the amount of the assets or liabilities of the trust company shall be guilty of a Class IV felony.
| Source | Laws 1911, c. 31, § 13, p. 195; R.S.1913, § 751; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVIII, § 19, p. 723; C.S.1922, § 8081; C.S.1929, § 8-220; Laws 1933, c. 18, § 84, p. 179; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-220; R.S.1943, § 8-225; Laws 1977, LB 40, § 54; Laws 1993, LB 81, § 41; Laws 1998, LB 1321, § 49. |
8-226
Trust terms; use restricted; penalty.(1) No individual, firm, corporation, or association doing business directly or indirectly in the State of Nebraska shall use the words trust, trust company, trust association, or trust fund as any part of its title except:
(a) A trust company as defined in section 8-230;
(b) A trust company chartered and supervised under the laws of the United States or any other state;
(c) A bank or savings association chartered and supervised under the laws of the United States or any other state, if such bank or savings association has been further chartered to conduct a trust company business;
(d) A limited partnership to the extent authorized by subdivision (5) of section 67-234;
(e) An entity required by any other law to use such words; or
(f) Except as provided in subsection (2) of this section.
(2) Notwithstanding the provisions of subsection (1) of this section:
(a) An organization described in section 501(c)(3) of the Internal Revenue Code and exempt from taxation under section 501(a) of the code may use the words trust or trust fund;
(b) A trust created by a testamentary or fiduciary document may use the word trust; and
(c) An account in a financial institution established by or on behalf of trusts referenced in subdivision (b) of this subsection may use the words trust or trust fund.
(3) A violation of this section is a Class V misdemeanor.
| Source | Laws 1911, c. 31, § 13, p. 195; R.S.1913, § 752; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XVIII, § 20, p. 723; C.S.1922, § 8082; C.S.1929, § 8-221; R.S.1943, § 8-226; Laws 1977, LB 40, § 55; Laws 1993, LB 81, § 42; Laws 1996, LB 1268, § 1; Laws 1997, LB 44, § 1. |
8-227
State trust company; merger or consolidation with national banking association; procedure.Any state trust company, with the approval of the Department of Banking and Finance, may, upon a vote of the holders of at least two-thirds of its capital stock, merge or consolidate with a national banking association, as provided by federal law, by causing a certificate to be filed with the Department of Banking and Finance setting forth the resolution of the stockholders of the state trust company and that the resolution has been duly adopted by the holders of at least two-thirds of the capital stock of the trust company.
| Source | Laws 1959, c. 20, § 1, p. 145; Laws 1993, LB 81, § 43. |
8-228
State trust company; merger or consolidation with a national bank; effect.When a state trust company has merged or consolidated with a national bank, the resulting national bank and trust company shall be considered the same business and corporate entity as the former national bank and the former trust company and as a continuation thereof and the ownership and title to all properties, assets, obligations, and liabilities of the merging or consolidating trust company shall automatically pass to and become the properties, assets, obligations, and liabilities of the resulting national bank and trust company and shall be deemed to be transferred to and vested in the resulting national bank and trust company without any deed or other transfer. The resulting national bank and trust company, by virtue of such consolidation or merger and without any order or other action on the part of any court or otherwise, shall hold and enjoy the same and all rights of property, franchises, and interests, including appointments, designations, and nominations and all other rights and interests as trustee, personal representative, administrator, registrar of stocks and bonds, guardian of estates, assignee, receiver, and in every other fiduciary capacity, in the same manner and to the same extent as such rights, franchises, and interests were held or enjoyed by any such merging or consolidating trust company at the time of such merger or consolidation. Upon the merger or consolidation, the state charter of the merging or consolidating state trust company shall automatically terminate and the charter shall be returned to the Department of Banking and Finance. Securities pledged to the department in accordance with section 8-209 shall be transferred to the name of the resulting national bank and trust company.
| Source | Laws 1959, c. 20, § 2, p. 146; Laws 1986, LB 909, § 6; Laws 1993, LB 81, § 44. |
8-229
State trust company; merger or consolidation with a national bank; redemption of stock; when; value, how determined.When the merger or consolidation becomes effective, the owner of shares of a state trust company which were voted against a merger or consolidation with a national bank shall be entitled to receive the value of the stock in cash from the assets of the state trust company when the merger or consolidation becomes effective, upon written demand made to the resulting national bank and trust company at any time within thirty days after the effective date of the merger or consolidation, accompanied by the surrender of the stock certificates. The value of the shares shall be determined as of the date of the shareholders' meeting approving the merger or consolidation, by three appraisers, one to be selected by the owners of two-thirds of the shares voting against the merger or consolidation, one by the board of directors of the resulting national bank and trust company, and the third by the two so chosen. If the appraisal is not completed within sixty days after the merger or consolidation becomes effective, the Department of Banking and Finance may cause an appraisal to be made and the resulting appraisal shall then govern. The expenses of the appraisal caused to be made by the department shall be paid by the resulting national bank and trust company.
| Source | Laws 1959, c. 20, § 3, p. 146; Laws 1993, LB 81, § 45. |
8-229.01
State trust company; merger or consolidation with state bank; procedure.Any state trust company, with the approval of the Department of Banking and Finance, may, upon a vote of the holders of at least two-thirds of its capital stock, merge or consolidate with any state bank which has obtained powers to conduct a trust business pursuant to the Nebraska Trust Company Act. The merging trust company must file with the department a certificate of the stockholders of the trust company that the resolution to merge or consolidate has been duly adopted by the holders of at least two-thirds of the capital stock of the trust company.
| Source | Laws 1993, LB 81, § 46; Laws 1998, LB 1321, § 50. |
8-229.02
State trust company; merger or consolidation with a state bank; effect.When a state trust company has merged or consolidated with a state bank, the resulting state bank and trust company shall be considered the same business and corporate entity as the former state bank and the former trust company and as a continuation thereof. The ownership and title to all properties, assets, obligations, and liabilities of the merging or consolidating trust company shall automatically pass to and become the properties, assets, obligations, and liabilities of the resulting state bank and trust company and shall be deemed to be transferred to and vested in the resulting state bank and trust company without any deed or other transfer. The resulting state bank and trust company, by virtue of such consolidation or merger and without any order or other action on the part of any court or otherwise, shall hold and enjoy the same and all right of property, franchises, and interests, including appointments, designations, and nominations and all other rights and interests as trustee, personal representative, administrator, registrar of stocks and bonds, guardian of estates, assignee, receiver, and in every other fiduciary capacity, in the same manner and to the same extent as such rights, franchises, and interests were held or enjoyed by any such merging or consolidating trust company at the time of such merger or consolidation. Upon the merger or consolidation, the state charter of the merging or consolidating state trust company shall automatically be transferred to the resulting state bank and trust company.
| Source | Laws 1993, LB 81, § 47. |
8-229.03
State trust company; merger or consolidation with a state bank; redemption of stock; when; value, how determined.When the merger or consolidation becomes effective, the owner of shares of a trust company which were voted against a merger or consolidation with a state bank shall be entitled to receive the value of the stock in cash from the assets of the state trust company upon written demand made to the resulting state bank and trust company at any time within thirty days after the effective date of the merger or consolidation accompanied by the surrender of the stock certificates. The value of the shares shall be determined as of the date of the shareholders' meeting approving the merger or consolidation. An appraisal shall be conducted by three appraisers, one to be selected by the owners of two-thirds of the shares voting against the merger or consolidation, one by the board of directors of the resulting state bank and trust company, and the third by the two so chosen. If the appraisal is not completed within sixty days after the merger or consolidation becomes effective, the Department of Banking and Finance may cause an appraisal to be made and the resulting appraisal shall then govern. The expenses of the appraisal caused to be made by the department shall be paid by the resulting state bank and trust company.
| Source | Laws 1993, LB 81, § 48. |
8-230
Terms, defined.For purposes of the Nebraska Trust Company Act, unless the context otherwise requires:
(1) Agency capacity means a capacity resulting from a trust company undertaking to act alone or jointly with others primarily as agent for another in all matters connected with its undertaking, including the capacities of registrar, paying agent, or transfer agent with respect to stocks, bonds, or other evidences of indebtedness of any corporation, association, municipality, state, or public authority, escrow agent, or agent for the investment of money or any other similar capacity;
(2) Branch trust office means an office of a trust company, other than the main or principal office of a trust company, at which a trust company may act in any fiduciary capacity or conduct any activity permitted under the Nebraska Trust Company Act;
(3) Fiduciary capacity means a capacity resulting from a trust company undertaking to act alone or jointly with others primarily for the benefit of another in all matters connected with the undertaking and includes the capacities of trustee, including trustee of a common trust fund, administrator, personal representative, guardian of an estate, conservator, receiver, attorney in fact, and custodian and any other similar capacity;
(4) Representative trust office means an office at which a trust company does not act in any fiduciary capacity or conduct or engage in any activity related to its fiduciary capacities but may otherwise engage in any other activity permitted under the Nebraska Trust Company Act; and
(5) Trust company means any trust company which is incorporated under the laws of this state, any national banking association having its principal office in this state and authorized to conduct a trust company business as defined in the Nebraska Trust Company Act, any bank authorized to conduct a trust company business in a trust department pursuant to sections 8-159 to 8-162, any federal savings association authorized to conduct a trust company business, and any federally chartered trust company.
| Source | Laws 1977, LB 338, § 1; Laws 1986, LB 909, § 7; Laws 1993, LB 81, § 49; Laws 1998, LB 1321, § 51. |
8-231
Trust company; substituted in fiduciary capacity for affiliated bank; application; court order; filing.(1) Any trust company which has been duly authorized to commence the business for which it is organized and which has made the pledge of securities required by sections 8-209 and 8-210 may file an application in the county court of the county in which an affiliated bank is located requesting that it be substituted, except as may be expressly excluded in such application, in every fiduciary capacity for such affiliated bank specified in the application, and such specified affiliated bank shall join in such application. Such application may be made by the trust company seeking substitution and need not list the fiduciary capacities in which substitution is proposed to be made. For purposes of this section, affiliated bank with respect to a trust company shall mean any bank incorporated under the laws of this state and any national banking association having its principal office in this state, more than fifty percent of the voting stock of which is owned directly or indirectly by the same bank holding company as defined in the United States Bank Holding Company Act, as amended, that owns directly or indirectly more than fifty percent of the voting stock of such trust company. The county court may require such notice as it deems necessary.
(2) When the county court finds that such trust company has been duly authorized to commence the business for which it is organized and that it has made a pledge of securities in accordance with sections 8-209 and 8-210, the county court may enter an order substituting such trust company in every fiduciary capacity for the specified affiliated bank except as may be otherwise specified in the application.
(3) Upon entry of such order, such trust company shall, without further act, be substituted in every such fiduciary capacity, and such application may be evidenced by filing a copy of the order with the clerk of any county court in this state.
| Source | Laws 1977, LB 338, § 2; Laws 1993, LB 81, § 50. |
8-232
Designation of bank as fiduciary in a will or other instrument; effect.Each designation in a will or other instrument executed either before, on, or after September 9, 1993, in which a bank is designated as fiduciary shall be deemed a designation of the trust company substituted for the bank pursuant to sections 8-230 to 8-233 except when the will or other instrument is executed after such substitution. Any grant in a will or other instrument of any discretionary power shall be deemed conferred upon the trust company deemed designated as the fiduciary pursuant to this section.
| Source | Laws 1977, LB 338, § 3; Laws 1993, LB 81, § 51. |
8-233
Trust company; substituted as fiduciary; accounting; transfer of assets.A bank shall account jointly with the trust company which has been substituted as fiduciary for the bank pursuant to sections 8-230 to 8-233 for the accounting period during which the trust company is initially so substituted. Upon substitution pursuant to sections 8-230 to 8-233, the bank shall deliver to the trust company all assets held by the bank as fiduciary, except assets held for accounts with respect to which there has been no substitution pursuant to sections 8-230 to 8-233, and upon substitution all the assets shall become the property of the trust company without the necessity of any instrument of transfer or conveyance.
| Source | Laws 1977, LB 338, § 4; Laws 1993, LB 81, § 52. |
8-234
Branch trust offices authorized; procedure.(1) With the approval of the Director of Banking and Finance, a corporation organized to do business as a trust company under the Nebraska Trust Company Act may establish and maintain branch trust offices within this state and in any other state pursuant to section 8-2303.
(2) A corporation organized to do business as a trust company under the Nebraska Trust Company Act, in order to establish a branch trust office in Nebraska pursuant to subsection (1) of this section, shall apply to the Director of Banking and Finance on a form prescribed by the director. Upon receipt of a substantially complete application, the director shall hold a public hearing on the matter if he or she determines, in his or her discretion, that the condition of the corporation organized to do business as a trust company warrants a hearing. If the director determines that the condition of the corporation organized to do business as a trust company does not warrant a hearing, the director shall (a) publish a notice of the filing of the application in a newspaper of general circulation in the county where the proposed branch trust office would be located and (b) give notice of such application for a branch trust office to all financial institutions within the county where the proposed branch trust office would be located and to such other interested parties as the director may determine. The director shall send the notice to financial institutions by first-class mail, postage prepaid, or electronic mail. Electronic mail may be used if the financial institution agrees in advance to receive such notices by electronic mail. If the director receives a substantive objection to the proposed branch trust office within fifteen days after publication of such notice, he or she shall hold a hearing on the application. Notice of a hearing held pursuant to this subsection shall be published for two consecutive weeks in a newspaper of general circulation in the county where the proposed branch trust office would be located. The expense of any publication and mailing required by this section shall be paid by the applicant. The date for hearing the application shall not be more than ninety days after the filing of the application and not less than thirty-one days after the last publication of notice of hearing. The costs of the hearing shall be assessed in accordance with the rules and regulations of the Department of Banking and Finance.
(3) The director shall approve the application for a branch trust office if he or she finds that (a) the establishment of the branch trust office would not adversely affect the financial condition of the corporation organized to do business as a trust company, (b) there is a need in the community for the branch trust office, and (c) establishment of the branch trust office would be in the public interest.
(4) With the approval of the director, a state-chartered bank authorized to conduct a trust business pursuant to sections 8-159 to 8-162 may establish and maintain branch trust offices within this state and in any other state pursuant to section 8-2303. The procedure for the establishment of any branch trust office under this subsection shall be the same as provided in subsections (2) and (3) of this section. The activities at the branch trust office shall be limited to the activities permitted by the Nebraska Trust Company Act, and the general business of banking shall not be conducted at the branch trust office. Nothing in this subsection is intended to prohibit the establishment of a branch pursuant to section 8-157 at which trust business may be conducted.
(5) A branch trust office of a corporation organized to do business as a trust company or of a state-chartered bank shall not be closed without the prior written approval of the director.
| Source | Laws 1998, LB 1321, § 52; Laws 2002, LB 1089, § 5; Laws 2003, LB 217, § 10; Laws 2005, LB 533, § 14; Laws 2008, LB851, § 10. March 20, 2008 |
8-235
Representative trust offices authorized; procedure.(1) With the approval of the Director of Banking and Finance, a corporation organized to do business as a trust company under the Nebraska Trust Company Act may establish and maintain representative trust offices within this state and in any other state pursuant to section 8-2304.
(2) A corporation organized to do business as a trust company under the Nebraska Trust Company Act, in order to establish a representative trust office in Nebraska pursuant to subsection (1) of this section, shall apply to the Director of Banking and Finance on a form prescribed by the director. Within sixty days after receipt of a substantially complete application, the director shall notify the trust company of his or her decision on the application. If the director does not act on the application, the application shall be deemed approved on the sixty-first day after receipt of a substantially complete application.
(3) The director shall approve the application for a representative trust office if he or she finds that:
(a) The establishment of the representative trust office would not adversely affect the financial condition of the trust company;
(b) The activities at the representative trust office will be limited to nonfiduciary trust activities; and
(c) Establishment of the representative trust office would be in the public interest.
(4) A state-chartered bank authorized to conduct a trust business pursuant to sections 8-159 to 8-162 may establish and maintain representative trust offices within this state and in any other state pursuant to section 8-2304. The procedure for the establishment of any representative trust offices under this subsection shall be the same as provided in subsections (2) and (3) of this section. The activities at the representative trust office shall be limited to the activities permitted by the Nebraska Trust Company Act, except that no fiduciary activities may be conducted at the representative trust offices. The general business of banking shall not be conducted at the representative trust offices.
(5) A representative trust office shall not be closed unless the trust company or state-chartered bank provides sixty days' prior written notice to the director.
| Source | Laws 1998, LB 1321, § 53. |
8-301
Supervision and control; powers of Department of Banking and Finance.The Department of Banking and Finance shall have power to issue permits to and shall have general supervision and control of all building and loan associations as defined in sections 8-301 to 8-340.01.
| Source | Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XIX, § 1, p. 723; C.S.1922, § 8083; C.S.1929, § 8-301; R.S.1943, § 8-301; Laws 2000, LB 932, § 7. |
Supervision and control extends to branches. First Fed. Sav. & Loan Assn. v. Department of Banking, 187 Neb. 562, 192 N.W.2d 736 (1971).
8-301.01
Repealed. Laws 1984, LB 899, § 7.
8-302
Power to require and receive payments from members; limitations.Any association of not less than five persons, which shall be organized within this state for the purpose of raising money to be loaned among its members, shall be authorized and empowered to levy, assess and collect from its members such sums of money by rates of stated dues, fines, interest and premiums on loans, as the corporation may provide in its articles of incorporation or bylaws, and to exercise such other powers as are hereinafter conferred. Every such corporation may, however, receive payments from its members in any amount, which together with the balance, if any, formerly to the credit of the member thus paying, upon the books of the corporation, shall not exceed the par value of the shares of stock held by him.
| Source | Laws 1899, c. 17, § 1, p. 84; R.S.1913, § 485; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XIX, § 2, p. 724; C.S.1922, § 8084; C.S.1929, § 8-302; Laws 1937, c. 19, § 1, p. 125; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-302; R.S.1943, § 8-302; Laws 1978, LB 717, § 1. |
Failure of foreign association to renew its authority to transact business in this state does not invalidate prior contracts. Eastern B. & L. Assn. v. Tonkinson, 76 Neb. 470, 107 N.W. 762 (1906).A building and loan association may deduct from a loan made to one of its members the premium bid for the right of precedence in taking a loan, provided such loan was made under a system of open competitive bidding. South Omaha L. & B. Assn. v. Wirrick, 63 Neb. 598, 88 N.W. 694 (1902).Section held constitutional. Nebraska L. & B. Assn. v. Perkins, 61 Neb. 254, 85 N.W. 67 (1901); Livingston L. & B. Assn. v. Drummond, 49 Neb. 200, 68 N.W. 375 (1896).Stockholder cannot rescind, recover money paid for stock and repudiate obligations assumed, on account of mismanagement of officers. American B. & L. Assn. v. Bear, 48 Neb. 455, 67 N.W. 500 (1896).Act cannot affect contracts made before its passage. American B. & L. Assn. v. Rainbolt, 48 Neb. 434, 67 N.W. 493 (1896).Subscribers seeking rescission of contract must return stock as condition to right to rescind. Building & L. Assn. of Dakota v. Cameron, 48 Neb. 124, 66 N.W. 1109 (1896).Corporations, not building and loan associations, though similar in character, may incorporate under general law. York Park Bldg. Assn. v. Barnes, 39 Neb. 834, 58 N.W. 440 (1894).Company will be bound by that construction of the contract which it understood and knew the other party placed upon it, by which the other party was induced to enter into contract. People's B. L. & S. Assn. v. Klauber, 1 Neb. Unof. 676, 95 N.W. 1072 (1901).
8-303
Stock; ownership; limit; investment shares; loans.(1) No person shall hold in his own right, or jointly with others, a total of withdrawal value of investment stock of more than sixty thousand dollars or an amount representing two percent of the total assets of the association, whichever is greater, except that investment shares which, when issued by an association, are within the limits prescribed in this subsection, may continue to be lawfully held irrespective of any shrinkage in the assets of the association.
(2) In any association, borrowing members may hold stock to the amount of sixty thousand dollars or an amount equal to five percent of the assets of the association, whichever amount is greater, except that (a) no borrowing member may hold stock in excess of one hundred thousand dollars unless that association has a reserve fund of at least five percent of the total assets of the association; and (b) if stock held by borrowing members which, when issued by an association, is within the limits prescribed in this subsection, it shall continue to be lawfully held irrespective of any shrinkage in the assets of the association.
(3) Notwithstanding the provision of this section, an association may issue any investment shares and make any loan to borrowing members which is or may be permitted to a federal association doing business in this state.
| Source | Laws 1899, c. 17, § 1, p. 84; R.S.1913, § 485; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XIX, § 2, p. 724; C.S.1922, § 8084; C.S.1929, § 8-302; Laws 1937, c. 19, § 1, p. 125; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-302; R.S.1943, § 8-303; Laws 1945, c. 9, § 1, p. 106; Laws 1953, c. 8, § 1, p. 72; Laws 1955, c. 10, § 1, p. 76; Laws 1959, c. 21, § 1, p. 147; Laws 1969, c. 37, § 1, p. 244. |
8-304
Stockholders; voting; limitations.Subject to the limitations set forth in section 8-303, each investing member shall be permitted to cast one vote for each hundred dollars of withdrawal value of his stock. Each borrowing member shall be permitted as a borrower to cast one vote, or to cast one vote for each one hundred dollars of the credit value of his stock. Fifteen or more members present at a regular or special meeting of members constitute a quorum. Voting may be by proxy if the instrument authorizing the proxy to vote shall have been executed by a member.
| Source | Laws 1899, c. 17, § 1, p. 84; R.S.1913, § 485; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XIX, § 2, p. 724; C.S.1922, § 8084; C.S.1929, § 8-302; Laws 1937, c. 19, § 1, p. 125; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-302; R.S.1943, § 8-304; Laws 1945, c. 9, § 2, p. 107; Laws 1953, c. 9, § 1, p. 74. |
8-305
Corporate name; requirements; penalty.The words loan and building association, building association, building and loan association, savings and loan association, or loan and savings association, shall form part of the corporate name of every such corporation. No individual, firm, company, corporation, or association operating in the State of Nebraska, unless (1) organized under authority of the federal government, (2) organized as a building and loan association under the authority of any foreign state and complying with the provisions of the Nebraska statutes, (3) organized and incorporated under and in accordance with the provisions of sections 8-301 to 8-384, or (4) having been in existence and doing business in Nebraska under its present name for a period of ten years prior to January 1, 1949, shall, after August 27, 1949, use in its name the words loan and building association, building and loan association, savings and loan association, loan and savings association, loan and building, building and loan, savings and loan, loan and savings, building and savings, or savings and building, in combination with any other word or words. Any person, firm, company, corporation, or association violating this section shall be guilty of a Class V misdemeanor for each offense. Each day such person, firm, or corporation shall use any such prohibited words shall be deemed a separate and distinct offense in violation of this section.
| Source | Laws 1899, c. 17, § 1, p. 84; R.S.1913, § 485; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XIX, § 2, p. 724; C.S.1922, § 8084; C.S.1929, § 8-302; Laws 1937, c. 19, § 1, p. 126; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-302; R.S.1943, § 8-305; Laws 1949, c. 9, § 1, p. 69; Laws 1977, LB 40, § 56; Laws 2000, LB 932, § 8; Laws 2005, LB 533, § 15. |
8-306
Capital stock; amount; articles of incorporation; filing fees.The capital stock of an association is not limited and shall consist of the aggregate of payments made by its members and dividends credited thereon, less withdrawals, and shall be represented by shares. It shall not be necessary for any association organized in and operating under the laws of the State of Nebraska to state in its articles of incorporation, or an amendment or amendments thereto, any amount of authorized capital stock. Upon the filing of articles of incorporation, or an amendment or amendments thereto, an association shall pay a filing fee of twenty-five dollars to the Secretary of State.
| Source | Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XIX, § 2, p. 724; C.S.1922, § 8084; C.S.1929, § 8-302; Laws 1937, c. 19, § 1, p. 126; C.S.Supp., 1941, § 8-302; R.S.1943, § 8-306; Laws 1953, c. 10, § 1, p. 75. |
Under prior law, law required building and loan association to file articles with Secretary of State and pay filing fee in advance based upon authorized capital stock. State ex rel. Equitable Bldg. L. & S. Assn. v. Amsberry, 104 Neb. 843, 178 N.W. 828 (1920).
8-307
Repealed. Laws 1978, LB 717, § 7.
8-307.01
Pensions and retirement plans; adoption.A building and loan association may provide for pensions, retirement plans, and other benefits for its officers and employees, and may contribute to the cost thereof in accordance with the plan adopted by a two-thirds vote of the board of directors, and approved by a vote of a majority of all the stockholders represented at an annual meeting of such association upon written notice mailed ten days prior to the annual meeting to the last-known address of each stockholder as shown by the books of the association that a pension or retirement plan, or other plan for benefits for its officers and employees will be presented at such meeting, and approved by the Department of Banking and Finance.
| Source | Laws 1953, c. 14, § 1, p. 80. |
8-308
Stock; credit value; right of shareholder to withdraw; conditions; withdrawal notice; exception for liquidation.Any shareholder of an association shall be permitted to withdraw any or all of the credit value of his or her stock as shown by the books of the association, provided such stock is not pledged as security for a loan, by giving written notice of such intention to the secretary or managing officer of the association, and, at the expiration of thirty days following such notice, the member so withdrawing, or, if deceased, his legal representative, shall be entitled to receive the credit value of the stock at the time such notice was given, together with such proportion of the net profits accruing since the last dividend date, if the bylaws so provide and determine, less the admission fee, if any, or other just and lawful charges; Provided, the right to so withdraw shall not apply to shareholders of an association in process of liquidation.
| Source | Laws 1899, c. 17, § 3, p. 85; R.S.1913, § 488; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XIX, § 4, p. 724; C.S.1922, § 8086; C.S.1929, § 8-304; Laws 1941, c. 12, § 1, p. 84; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-304; R.S.1943, § 8-308. |
8-309
Stock; withdrawal; limit; funds applicable.At no time shall more than one-half of the unloaned funds in the treasury of the association and one-half of the accumulations thereto be applicable to the demands of the withdrawing shareholders without the consent by resolution of the board of directors. If there is delay in meeting payment to withdrawing members due to insufficient funds applicable to such purpose, such members shall be paid, and their stock thus repurchased retired, in the order of the filing of their withdrawal notices as funds applicable therefor are available.
| Source | Laws 1899, c. 17, § 3, p. 86; R.S.1913, § 488; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XIX, § 4, p. 725; C.S.1922, § 8086; C.S.1929, § 8-304; Laws 1941, c. 12, § 1, p. 84; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-304; R.S.1943, § 8-309. |
8-310
Stock; withdrawal; insufficient funds to meet notices; limit of loans; requirements.So long as any association is delayed in meeting payment to withdrawing members due to insufficient funds applicable to such purpose, any loan made to a member shall be from funds not applicable for payment to withdrawing members, and shall not exceed one-half of the credit value of the member's stock unless secured also by the pledge of real estate. If the only security for such a loan be a pledge of the member's stock, the association shall take from the borrower a note for the payment thereof with interest, payable on demand, and a notice for withdrawal of sufficient of the stock to pay such note and interest unless such notice is already on file, and the association shall not demand payment of such note until it has funds available for the payment of the withdrawal notice in the sequence of its filing.
| Source | Laws 1941, c. 12, § 1, p. 84; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-304; R.S.1943, § 8-310. |
8-311
Stock; withdrawals by borrowing members; funds applicable.Withdrawals by a borrowing member from credits on stock pledged as security in connection with a real estate loan made by the association shall be permitted only at the discretion of the association, and if the association is delayed in meeting payments to withdrawing members due to insufficient funds applicable to such purpose, withdrawals permitted to such a borrowing member shall be paid only out of the funds of the association available for the making of real estate loans.
| Source | Laws 1941, c. 12, § 1, p. 84; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-304; R.S.1943, § 8-311. |
8-312
Stock; enforcement of withdrawals by directors.If the association has funds applicable for withdrawals and more than needed to retire the shares of members who have given written notice of an intention to withdraw, the directors may, if in their discretion it shall be for the best interests of the association, retire any unpledged shares by enforcing withdrawals of the same, subject to the approval and consent of the Department of Banking and Finance, and the owner or owners shall be paid the full credit value of such shares, which shall be the total of payments and dividends credited thereon less prior withdrawals, if any.
| Source | Laws 1899, c. 17, § 3, p. 86; R.S.1913, § 488; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XIX, § 4, p. 725; C.S.1922, § 8086; C.S.1929, § 8-304; Laws 1941, c. 12, § 1, p. 85; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-304; R.S.1943, § 8-312. |
8-313
Stock; enforced withdrawal; time; notice of intention.Such retirements, if made, shall be made immediately after a period fixed by the bylaws of the association for the declaration and payment of dividends of earnings, and the association shall, at least sixty days before so retiring any shares, send written notice to each person shown by the books of the association to be an owner of such shares, mailed to such person's last-known address, which notice shall inform such persons of the intent of the association to make the retirement on a designated date.
| Source | Laws 1941, c. 12, § 1, p. 85; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-304; R.S.1943, § 8-313. |
8-314
Stock; enforced withdrawal; notice of intention; contents.The association shall without delay, upon so retiring shares by order of its board of directors, send a written notice to each person shown by the books of the association to be an owner of shares thus retired, mailed to such person's last-known address, which notice shall contain information of the retirement of the shares and of the number of the certificate representing said shares, and of the amount to be paid to such owner upon delivery to the association of said certificate.
| Source | Laws 1941, c. 12, § 1, p. 85; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-304; R.S.1943, § 8-314. |
8-315
Loans; prepayment; required provisions; procedure.The bylaws shall also contain equitable provisions permitting the payment of loans before maturity, as follows: The borrower shall be charged with the full amount of his loan, together with all arrearages due thereon or on the shares pledged, or appertaining to the security given, and shall thereupon be allowed, as a credit, the withdrawal value of the shares pledged as security together with an equitable share of the premium, if any, paid in advance, and such other credits as may be returnable on account thereof, and the balance shall be received by the association in full settlement and discharge of such loan. The credits on shares pledged in connection with a loan secured by mortgage on real estate, may at any time, and in whole or in part, be appropriated by any association and applied in reduction of such loan. The withdrawal value of shares pledged as a part of a loan transaction, where such loan is secured by mortgage on real estate, shall be the total amount of the payments on such shares as shown by the books of the association, together with such proportionate share of the earnings as the borrower may be entitled to under the bylaws of the association, less the amounts of previous appropriations and applications on the loan and withdrawals, if any. The association shall not directly or indirectly charge any membership, admission, withdrawal, or any other fee or sum of money for the privilege of becoming, remaining, or ceasing to be a member of the association, except charges upon the making or modification of a loan authorized by section 8-330. Except as authorized by this section and section 8-316, the association shall not charge any member any sum of money by way of fine or penalty for any cause. Payments on real estate loans shall be applied first to the payment of interest on the unpaid balance of the loan and the remainder on the reduction of principal. Any delinquent real estate taxes, both regular and special, which become a prior lien to the association's mortgage, may be paid by the association and added to the unpaid balance of the loan.
| Source | Laws 1899, c. 17, § 4, p. 86; R.S.1913, § 489; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XIX, § 5, p. 725; C.S.1922, § 8087; C.S.1929, § 8-305; Laws 1935, c. 14, § 1, p. 83; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-305; R.S.1943, § 8-315; Laws 1967, c. 24, § 1, p. 129; Laws 1978, LB 717, § 2. |
8-316
Loans; delinquency; required provisions; association's rights; computation of balance due.The bylaws shall further provide that if any member has become delinquent in his payment on any shares pledged for the security of any loan from the association, which delinquency shall include delinquent real estate taxes both regular or special irrespective of whether paid by the association and charged to principal or unpaid and a prior lien on the property, and such delinquency represents more than two monthly payments, such shares may be canceled, and he shall, as to such shares, cease to be a member of the association, and the withdrawal value, if any, of such shares at the date of cancellation, shall be credited on his loan. If, after the aforesaid credits, or other credits, a balance remains due the association on account of said loan, it may recover the balance either by the foreclosure and sale of the security given or by an action at law upon the evidence of indebtedness. The withdrawal value of shares pledged as a part of a loan transaction, where such loan is secured by mortgage on real estate, shall be the total amount of the payments on such shares as shown by the books of the association, together with such proportionate share of earnings as the borrower may be entitled to under the bylaws of the association, less the amounts of previous appropriations and applications on the loan and withdrawals, if any.
| Source | Laws 1899, c. 17, § 5, p. 87; R.S.1913, § 490; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XIX, § 6, p. 726; C.S.1922, § 8088; C.S.1929, § 8-306; Laws 1935, c. 14, § 2, p. 83; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-306; R.S.1943, § 8-316; Laws 1967, c. 24, § 2, p. 130; Laws 1978, LB 717, § 3. |
Receiver of insolvent association can recover from member amount loaned, with interest at legal rate, less amount paid on interest and premium, with interest from date of the several payments. Anselme v. American S. & L. Assn., 63 Neb. 525, 88 N.W. 665 (1902).Mortgage stipulating that borrower should receive credits for withdrawal value of shares in case of foreclosure, gives right to have same fixed and credited according to contract. Equitable B. & L. Assn. v. Bidwell, 60 Neb. 169, 82 N.W. 384 (1900).
8-317
Certificates of stock; records; payments; matured stock; right to withdraw.Certificates of stock or other written evidence thereof shall be issued for each account in conformity with sections 8-301 to 8-340.01 and the bylaws. Every stockholder shall receive credit on the books of the association for all amounts paid by the stockholder upon the stockholder's subscription for stock, together with the stockholder's pro rata share of all dividends declared, as hereinafter provided, and when the sum of such payments and dividends, less all fines or other charges, equal the par value of the shares of stock held by the stockholder, the stockholder shall be entitled to receive such par value, with such interest not exceeding the legal rate, as the directors may determine, from the time of maturity until paid. Holders of stock thus matured and members desiring to withdraw before such maturity shall be paid the value of their stock in the order of the maturity of or notice of withdrawal of such stock. At no time shall more than two-thirds of the unloaned funds in the treasury of the association, inclusive of such funds applicable to the demands of withdrawing stockholders, as hereinbefore provided, be applicable to the demands of holders of matured stock without the consent of the board of directors.
| Source | Laws 1899, c. 17, § 6, p. 87; R.S.1913, § 491; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XIX, § 7, p. 726; C.S.1922, § 8089; C.S.1929, § 8-307; R.S.1943, § 8-317; Laws 1947, c. 14, § 1, p. 79; Laws 1975, LB 481, § 2; Laws 1975, LB 508, § 1; Laws 1978, LB 717, § 4; Laws 2000, LB 932, § 9. |
This section only fixes property rights of persons named; strangers to deposit allowed to establish oral trust in the account. Eden v. Eden, 182 Neb. 768, 157 N.W.2d 543 (1968).Certificates issued by building and loan association to two or more persons are payable to any one of them. Rose v. Hooper, 175 Neb. 645, 122 N.W.2d 753 (1963).Joint tenancy as to building and loan shares of stock is controlled by this section. Kindler v. Kindler, 169 Neb. 153, 98 N.W.2d 881 (1959).When building and loan stock certificate is made to the joint account of two or more persons, the survivor or survivors are entitled to the full title thereto. Tobas v. Mutual Building & Loan Assn., 147 Neb. 676, 24 N.W.2d 870 (1946).
8-318
Stock; share account; deposits; withdrawal methods authorized; investments by fiduciaries; rights; retirement plan, investments; building and loan association as trustee or custodian; powers and duties.(1)(a) Shares of stock in any association, or in any federal savings and loan association incorporated under the provisions of the federal Home Owners' Loan Act of 1933, with its principal office and place of business in this state, may be subscribed for, held, transferred, surrendered, withdrawn, and forfeited and payments thereon received and receipted for by any person, regardless of age, in the same manner and with the same binding effect as though such person were of the age of majority, except that a minor or his or her estate shall not be bound on his or her subscription to stock except to the extent of payments actually made thereon.
(b) Whenever a share account is accepted by any building and loan association in the name of any person, regardless of age, the deposit may be withdrawn by the shareholder by any of the following methods:
(i) Check or other instrument in writing. The check or other instrument in writing constitutes a receipt or acquittance if the check or other instrument in writing is signed by the shareholder and constitutes a valid release in discharge to the building and loan association for all payments so made; or
(ii) Electronic means through:
(A) Preauthorized direct withdrawal;
(B) An automatic teller machine;
(C) A debit card;
(D) A transfer by telephone;
(E) A network, including the Internet; or
(F) Any electronic terminal, computer, magnetic tape, or other electronic means.
(c) This section shall not be construed to affect the rights, liabilities, or responsibilities of participants in an electronic fund transfer under the federal Electronic Fund Transfer Act, 15 U.S.C. 1693 et seq., as it existed on September 4, 2005, and shall not affect the legal relationships between a minor and any person other than the building and loan association.
(2) All trustees, guardians, personal representatives, administrators, and conservators appointed by the courts of this state may invest and reinvest in, acquire, make withdrawals in whole or in part, hold, transfer, or make new or additional investments in or transfers of shares of stock in any (a) building and loan association organized under the laws of the State of Nebraska or (b) federal savings and loan association incorporated under the provisions of the federal Home Owners' Loan Act of 1933, having its principal office and place of business in this state, without an order of approval from any court.
(3) Trustees created solely by the terms of a trust instrument may invest in, acquire, hold, and transfer such shares, and make withdrawals, in whole or in part, therefrom, without any order of court, unless expressly limited, restricted, or prohibited therefrom by the terms of such trust instrument.
(4) All building and loan associations referred to in this section are qualified to act as trustee or custodian within the provisions of the federal Self-Employed Individuals Tax Retirement Act of 1962, as amended, or under the terms and provisions of section 408(a) of the Internal Revenue Code, if the provisions of such retirement plan require the funds of such trust or custodianship to be invested exclusively in shares or accounts in the association or in other associations. If any such retirement plan, within the judgment of the association, constitutes a qualified plan under the federal Self-Employed Individuals Tax Retirement Act of 1962, or under the terms and provisions of section 408(a) of the Internal Revenue Code, and the regulations promulgated thereunder at the time the trust was established and accepted by the association, is subsequently determined not to be such a qualified plan or subsequently ceases to be such a qualified plan, in whole or in part, the association may continue to act as trustee of any deposits theretofore made under such plan and to dispose of the same in accordance with the directions of the member and beneficiaries thereof. No association, in respect to savings made under this section, shall be required to segregate such savings from other assets of the association. The association shall keep appropriate records showing in proper detail all transactions engaged in under the authority of this section.
| Source | Laws 1899, c. 17, § 7, p. 88; R.S.1913, § 492; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XIX, § 8, p. 726; C.S.1922, § 8090; C.S.1929, § 8-308; Laws 1939, c. 4, § 1, p. 62; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-308; R.S.1943, § 8-318; Laws 1953, c. 11, § 1, p. 76; Laws 1955, c. 11, § 1, p. 77; Laws 1971, LB 375, § 1; Laws 1975, LB 208, § 2; Laws 1986, LB 909, § 8; Laws 1995, LB 574, § 3; Laws 2005, LB 533, § 16. |
8-319
Loans; restricted to members; secured and unsecured; purposes; limit; parity with federal associations; security; participation in other loans; exceptions; educational loans.(1) No loan shall be made by such association except to its own members, and no loan shall be made to any member for any sum in excess of the par value of his or her stock. The borrower shall pledge to the association, as security for the loan, shares of a maturity value equal to the principal of the loan and, except as otherwise provided in this section, ample security by mortgage or deeds of trust on real estate. For purposes of this section, real property and real estate shall include a leasehold or subleasehold estate in real property under a lease or sublease the term of which does not expire, or which is renewable automatically or at the option of the holder or of the association so as not to expire for at least five years beyond the maturity of the debt. Loans made upon improved real estate, except as otherwise provided in this section, shall not exceed ninety-five percent of the reasonable normal cash value thereof, and all loans made on any other real estate shall not exceed three-fourths of the reasonable normal cash value thereof.
(2) An association may make a loan or loans in an amount exceeding ninety-five percent of the reasonable normal cash value of the real estate security (a) if such loan or loans are made to a veteran in accord with the provisions of 38 U.S.C., as now existing or as hereafter amended, (b) if the proceeds of the loan or loans are to be used in purchasing residential property or in constructing a dwelling on unimproved property owned by such veteran to be occupied as his or her home, used for the purpose of making repairs, alterations, or improvements in or paying delinquent indebtedness, taxes, or special assessments on residential property owned by the veteran and used by him or her as his or her home, or used in purchasing any land and buildings to be used by the applicant in pursuing a gainful occupation other than farming, and (c) if the Secretary of Veterans Affairs guarantees that portion of such loan or loans in excess of ninety-five percent of the reasonable normal cash value of the real estate security.
(3) An association is authorized to obtain insurance of its loans by the Federal Housing Administrator under Title II of the National Housing Act, as amended, and such loans so made upon improved real estate and so insured shall not be subject to the restrictions set forth in this section with reference to the maximum authorized amount of a loan.
(4) An association may make unsecured loans to its members if such loans (a) are insured under Title I and Title II of the National Housing Act, as amended, or (b) are for property alterations, repair, or improvements. The aggregate amount of loans made under subdivisions (a) and (b) of this subsection shall not at any time exceed twenty percent of the association's assets. Each loan made under subdivision (b) of this subsection shall be repayable in regular monthly installments within a period of twenty years and shall be supported by a written property statement on forms to be prescribed by the Department of Banking and Finance. An association may make secured loans to its members and may make loans under 38 U.S.C., as amended, under Chapter V, subchapter C of the Home Owners' Loan Act of 1933, as amended (12 U.S.C.), and on the security of mobile homes.
(5) The stock of such association may be accepted as security for a loan of the amount of the withdrawal value of such stock without other security.
(6) An association when so licensed may make loans to its own members upon the terms and security set forth in the Nebraska Installment Loan Act.
(7) Any provisions of this section to the contrary notwithstanding, an association may make any loan that a federal savings and loan association doing business in this state is or may be authorized to make.
(8) An association may invest in loans, obligations, and advances of credit, all of which are referred to in this subsection as loans, made for the payment of expenses of business school, technical training school, college, or university education, but no association shall make any investment in loans under this subsection if the principal amount of its investment in such loans, exclusive of any investment which is or which at the time of its making was otherwise authorized, would thereupon exceed five percent of its assets. Such loans may be secured, partly secured, or unsecured, and the association may require a comaker or comakers, insurance, guaranty under a governmental student loan guarantee plan, or other protection against contingencies. The borrower shall certify to the association that the proceeds of the loan are to be used by a full-time student solely for the payment of expenses of business, technical training school, college, or university education.
(9) An association may participate with other lenders in making loans of any type that an association may otherwise make if (a) each of the lenders is either an instrumentality of the United States Government or is insured by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation or, in the case of another lender, the interest of the association in such loan is superior to the participating interests of the other participants and (b) an association whose accounts are insured by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation which may be a federal association or an association chartered by this state, or another association chartered by this state which is not so insured, has otherwise complied with subsection (1) of this section with respect to loans to members.
(10) An association may sell to or purchase from any institution which is a savings association chartered by this state or the accounts of which are insured by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation a participating interest in any loan, whether or not, in the case of a purchase, the security is located within the association's regular lending area.
| Source | Laws 1899, c. 17, § 8, p. 88; R.S.1913, § 493; Laws 1917, c. 10, § 3, p. 67; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XIX, § 9, p. 727; C.S.1922, § 8091; C.S.1929, § 8-309; Laws 1933, c. 25, § 1, p. 197; Laws 1935, c. 14, § 3, p. 84; Laws 1937, c. 14, § 1, p. 118; Laws 1941, c. 90, § 32, p. 358; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-309; Laws 1943, c. 14, § 1(1), p. 78; R.S.1943, § 8-319; Laws 1945, c. 10, § 1, p. 108; Laws 1951, c. 12, § 1, p. 86; Laws 1955, c. 12, § 1, p. 79; Laws 1959, c. 21, § 2, p. 149; Laws 1965, c. 29, § 1, p. 204; Laws 1967, c. 25, § 1, p. 131; Laws 1971, LB 375, § 2; Laws 1976, LB 219, § 1; Laws 1979, LB 154, § 1; Laws 1980, LB 903, § 1; Laws 1991, LB 2, § 1; Laws 1992, LB 757, § 4; Laws 1997, LB 555, § 1; Laws 2001, LB 53, § 4. |
Cross Reference
Nebraska Installment Loan Act, see section 45-1001.
8-320
Reserve funds; idle funds; investments authorized; deposit of funds in banks.Any association may invest its reserve fund for the payment of contingent losses, any reserve fund created to protect against any other contingency, and any portion of its idle funds, not immediately needed to carry on its proper functions, as follows:
(1) In bonds, notes, warrants, or other direct obligations of the United States or of any city, village, county, township, or school, road, water, sewer, paving, drainage, or sanitary and improvement district or any other political subdivision of the State of Nebraska;
(2) In any securities and obligations issued by the Federal Home Loan Bank, the Federal National Mortgage Association, or successor corporations, bonds and debentures issued either singly or collectively by any of the twelve federal land banks, the twelve intermediate credit banks, or the thirteen banks for cooperatives under the supervision of the Farm Credit Administration, and securities of any other federal agency corporation; and
(3) In securities issued pursuant to the Nebraska Business Development Corporation Act.
Any provision of this section to the contrary notwithstanding, an association may make any investment that a federal savings and loan association doing business in this state is or may be authorized to make.
Any association may deposit its funds, or any part thereof, in any national or state bank insured by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation or any corporation successor thereto and receive therefor certificates of time or savings deposit or the usual bank passbook credit subject to check or in share accounts of any state or federal savings and loan association the accounts of which are insured by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation or any corporation successor thereto.
| Source | Laws 1917, c. 10, § 3, p. 68; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XIX, § 9, p. 727; C.S.1922, § 8091; C.S.1929, § 8-309; Laws 1933, c. 25, § 1, p. 197; Laws 1935, c. 14, § 3, p. 84; Laws 1937, c. 14, § 1, p. 119; Laws 1941, c. 90, § 32, p. 358; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-309; Laws 1943, c. 14, § 1(2), p. 79; R.S.1943, § 8-320; Laws 1955, c. 13, § 1, p. 81; Laws 1959, c. 263, § 3, p. 922; Laws 1963, c. 32, § 1, p. 192; Laws 1992, LB 757, § 5; Laws 2005, LB 533, § 17. |
Cross Reference
Nebraska Business Development Corporation Act, see section 21-2101.
8-320.01
Investments; service corporations.An association organized under the provisions of Chapter 8, article 3, may purchase, hold, and sell stock in any service corporation organized under the laws of the State of Nebraska whose stock is owned exclusively by building and loan associations whose operations are subject to audit by the Department of Banking and Finance and, if insured, by the Federal Home Loan Bank Board and whose activities are restricted to:
(1) The providing of clerical, bookkeeping, accounting, statistical, and data processing services primarily for building and loan associations;
(2) The purchase, development, and conveyance of real estate for the purpose of renovating and rehabilitating substandard housing including enrollment in state and federal programs in connection therewith, and for other lawful purposes;
(3) The servicing, purchasing, selling, and making of loans upon real estate and participating interests therein; and
(4) The investment in corporations whose principal activities are community development, urban renewal and industrial development.
| Source | Laws 1969, c. 44, § 1, p. 256. |
8-321
Loans; evidence of indebtedness; form; parity with federal associations.No evidence of indebtedness taken by said association for the return of any loan shall be negotiable in form, and whatever be its form, every such evidence of indebtedness shall be nonnegotiable in law, except as hereinafter provided, and no such debt or evidence of debt shall be assignable or transferable in any manner so as to prevent the discharge thereof by payments to the association, except as hereinafter provided, except that bonds and interest-bearing obligations, in which temporary investments may be made as hereinbefore provided, may be converted into cash in due course.
Notwithstanding the provision of this section, an association may sell or purchase such loans, and enter into such participation loans, as are or may be permitted to federal savings and loan associations doing business in this state.
| Source | Laws 1899, c. 17, § 8, p. 89; R.S.1913, § 493; Laws 1917, c. 10, § 3, p. 68; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XIX, § 9, p. 728; C.S.1922, § 8091; C.S.1929, § 8-309; Laws 1933, c. 25; § 1, p. 198; Laws 1935, c. 14, § 3, p. 85; Laws 1937, c. 14, § 1, p. 119; Laws 1941, c. 90, § 32, p. 358; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-309; Laws 1943, c. 14, § 1(3), p. 79; R.S.1943, § 8-321; Laws 1959, c. 21, § 3, p. 150. |
Provision hereof against assigning or transferring evidence of debt was inserted for protection of borrowing member and does not prevent equitable transfer by association. Nebraska Central B. & L. Assn. v. H. J. Hughes & Co., 121 Neb. 266, 236 N.W. 699 (1931).
8-322
Membership in Federal Home Loan Bank authorized; power to utilize federal agencies; power to obtain advances; use of funds.Any building and loan association is hereby authorized (1) to subscribe for the stock of and to become a member of the Federal Home Loan Bank for the district in which it may be located or for the stock of a Federal Home Loan Bank of an adjoining district if demanded by convenience; (2) to obtain advances from the Federal Home Loan Bank System, under the rules and regulations promulgated by the bank of which the association is a member, to obtain advances from any other corporation or agency established by or under authority of the United States Government, and to assign its mortgages or such other assets as may be required as security therefor; and (3) to do and perform such acts as may be necessary and required to avail to it all the advantages and privileges offered by the Federal Home Loan Bank or offered by any other corporation or agency established under the authority of the United States Government or any instrumentality of the United States Government.
| Source | Laws 1933, c. 25, § 1, p. 198; Laws 1935, c. 14, § 3, p. 85; Laws 1937, c. 14, § 1, p. 120; Laws 1941, c. 90, § 32, p. 359; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-309; Laws 1943, c. 14, § 1(4), p. 79; R.S.1943, § 8-322; Laws 1957, c. 14, § 1, p. 137. |
8-323
Mortgages; assignment to Home Owners' Loan Corporation authorized; condition.Any building and loan association is hereby authorized, with the approval of its board of directors, to assign its mortgages and the evidence of debt secured thereby to the Home Owners' Loan Corporation created by act of Congress of the United States under the act cited as the Home Owners' Loan Act of 1933, or such other corporation as may be created by authority of the United States Government, or as an instrumentality of the United States Government, and to accept as consideration for such assignment, cash or bonds of such Home Owners' Loan Corporation or such other corporation as may be created by authority of the United States Government, or as an instrumentality of the United States Government; Provided, that no mortgage given by any member of such association shall be so assigned without the written consent of the borrowing member.
| Source | Laws 1933, c. 25, § 1, p. 198; Laws 1935, c. 14, § 3, p. 85; Laws 1937, c. 14, § 1, p. 120; C.S.Supp.,1939, § 8-309; Laws 1941, c. 90, § 32, p. 359; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-309; Laws 1943, c. 14, § 1(5), p. 80; R.S.1943, § 8-323. |
8-324
Stock; availability for purchase of real estate or payment of loan.Any association, at the discretion of its officers and directors, and with the consent and approval of the Department of Banking and Finance, may accept its stock at the withdrawal value of such shares, to apply on the purchase at its fair market value, of any real estate owned by such association, or to apply in payment or reduction of any loans or contracts of sale on which, in the judgment of the officers and directors, there may be an eventual loss, whether or not notice for withdrawal of such shares shall have been filed, and such action shall not be considered prejudicial to the rights of any stockholders to whom payment on withdrawal notices is being delayed.
| Source | Laws 1933, c. 25, § 1, p. 199; Laws 1935, c. 14, § 3, p. 86; Laws 1937, c. 14, § 1, p. 120; Laws 1941, c. 90, § 32, p. 359; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-309; Laws 1943, c. 14, § 1(6), p. 80; R.S.1943, § 8-324. |
8-325
Real estate; acquisition and disposal; powers; limitations.Such association may purchase, hold, lease and convey real estate or stock for the following purposes and no others:
(1) Such real estate as it may need to occupy as a place of business;
(2) Such as shall in good faith be conveyed to it in satisfaction of debts contracted in the ordinary course of business;
(3) Such as it shall purchase at sales under judgments, decrees or mortgages held by the association, or shall purchase in good faith to secure debts due;
(4) Such as it shall in good faith acquire as a part of the consideration for the sale or exchange of real estate owned by it;
(5) Such as shall be acquired in salvaging the value of property owned by the association; and
(6) Such as is permitted building and loan service corporations under section 8-320.01. Nothing in this section shall be construed to forbid the mortgaging of real estate to such associations.
| Source | Laws 1899, c. 17, § 9, p. 89; R.S.1913, § 494; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XIX, § 10, p. 728; C.S.1922, § 8092; C.S.1929, § 8-310; Laws 1935, c. 11, § 1, p. 80; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-310; R.S.1943, § 8-325; Laws 1969, c. 38, § 1, p. 246. |
Association must dispose of title and possession to property held for five years. State ex rel. Johnson v. Conservative Savings and Loan Assn., 143 Neb. 805, 11 N.W.2d 89 (1943).
8-326
Reserve fund; requirements; replenishment; increase; reduction; division for federal tax purposes; special increase; approval by department.Every association organized under the laws of this state for the purposes set forth in section 8-302, except such associations as are conducted upon the serial plan and in which the various series are operated wholly separate and distinct from each other, shall provide a reserve fund for the payment of contingent losses, by setting aside at least five percent of the net earnings for each year to such fund until it reaches at least five percent of the total assets of the association exclusive of cash on hand. Any credit to a reserve account required by any federal agency shall be considered to apply to the reserve fund requirement of this section.
All losses shall be paid out of such fund until the same is exhausted, and whenever the amount in the fund falls below five percent of the total assets, it shall be replenished by annual appropriations of at least five percent of the net earnings until it again reaches the amount. The board of directors shall have power to increase the reserve above five percent, but not to exceed twelve percent, if determined that it is to the best interest of the association and its shareholders. An association may establish such other and additional undivided profits accounts or special reserves as may be ordered by its board of directors. The board of directors may, for federal tax purposes, divide the reserve fund, surplus account, and undivided profits account, in accordance with the provisions of the Internal Revenue Code and regulations adopted pursuant thereto. If, in the opinion of a majority of the board of directors of any such association, a reserve fund of twelve percent is insufficient at any time to cover the probable losses among the assets, or if for other good and sufficient reason they determine it to be for the best interests of the association and its shareholders that the reserve fund be maintained or increased, they shall have power to maintain or increase the fund from the net earnings to an amount not greater than the sum of such probable losses or greater than sufficient to best serve the interest of the association and its shareholders as by them determined. Such special increase of the reserve fund shall first be approved by the Department of Banking and Finance, and if, in the opinion of the department after an examination, such special increase of the reserve fund is deemed necessary or advisable for the protection of stockholders, the department may order such reserve fund increased in like manner and within the same limits as aforesaid. Such reserve fund may at any time, with the consent of the department, be reduced to not less than five percent of the assets.
| Source | Laws 1899, c. 17, § 10, p. 89; R.S.1913, § 495; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XIX, § 11, p. 728; C.S.1922, § 8093; C.S.1929, § 8-311; Laws 1937, c. 19, § 2, p. 126; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-311; R.S.1943, § 8-326; Laws 1963, c. 33, § 1, p. 193; Laws 1995, LB 574, § 4. |
8-327
Dividends; how and when paid.Every association of the character defined in section 8-326, shall be required, at least annually, to transfer the residue of earnings, after paying expenses and setting aside a sum for the reserve funds as herein provided, as a dividend to members holding share accounts. All such members shall participate in earnings pro rata to the withdrawal value of their respective accounts, except that an association may classify its share accounts according to the character, amount, or duration thereof, or regularity of additions thereto, and may agree in advance to pay an additional rate of earnings, over and above the minimum rate of earnings paid on share accounts, on accounts based on such classifications, and shall regulate such earnings in such manner that each share account in the same classification shall receive the same ratable portion of such additional earnings. Earnings may be declared on the withdrawal value of each share account at the beginning of the accounting period, plus additions thereto made during the period, less amounts previously withdrawn and amounts covered by notice for withdrawal which for earnings purposes shall be deducted from the latest previous additions thereto, computed at the declared rate for the time the funds have been invested determined as next provided. The date of investment shall be the date of actual receipt by the association of an account or an addition to an account, except that if the board of directors shall so determine, accounts in one or more classifications or additions thereto received by the association on or before a date not later than the twentieth day of the month, unless the day determined is not a business day and in such case it may be the next succeeding business day, shall receive earnings as if invested on the first day of the month in which such payments were received; and if the board shall make such determination, it also shall determine that payments received subsequent to such determination date shall either (1) receive earnings as if invested on the first day of the next succeeding month, or (2) receive earnings from the date of actual receipt by the association. The directors shall determine by resolution the method of calculating the amount of any earnings on share accounts as herein provided, and the time or times when earnings are to be declared, paid, or credited, but the association shall not be required to credit or pay dividends on inactive share accounts of fifty dollars or less.
| Source | Laws 1899, c. 17, § 11, p. 90; R.S.1913, § 496; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XIX, § 12, p. 729; C.S.1922, § 8094; C.S.1929, § 8-312; Laws 1941, c. 12, § 2, p. 85; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-312; R.S.1943, § 8-327; Laws 1967, c. 26, § 1, p. 135. |
8-328
Records; requirements.(1) Complete and adequate records of all accounts and of all minutes of proceedings of the members, directors and executive committee shall be maintained at all times at the office of the association. Records may be kept by hand, mechanical or electronic means.
(2) Every association shall maintain membership records, which shall show the name and address of the member, whether the member is a share account holder, or a borrower, or a share account holder and borrower, and the date of membership thereof. In the case of account-holding members, the association shall obtain a card containing the signature of the owner of such account or his duly authorized representative and shall preserve such signature card in the records of the association.
(3) Associations shall not be required to preserve or keep their records or files for a longer period than five years next after the first day of January of the year following the payment in full of a mortgage or other loan or the closing of a savings or investment account or the final closing or completion of any other contract or transaction; Provided, that ledger sheets showing unpaid accounts in favor of members of such savings and loan associations shall not be destroyed.
(4) No liability shall accrue against any association destroying any such records after the expiration of the time provided in subsection (3) of this section, and in any cause or proceedings in which any such records or files may be called in question or be demanded of the association or any officer or employee thereof, a showing that such records and files have been destroyed in accordance with the terms of subsection (3) of this section shall be a sufficient excuse for the failure to produce them.
(5) All causes of action against an association based upon a claim or claims inconsistent with an entry or entries in any savings and loan association record or ledger, made in the regular course of business, shall be deemed to have accrued, and shall accrue, one year after the date of such entry or entries; and no action founded upon such a cause may be brought after the expiration of five years from the date of such accrual.
(6) The provisions of this section, so far as applicable, shall apply to the records of federal savings and loan associations.
(7) Any association may cause any or all records kept by such association to be copied or reproduced by any photostatic, photographic or microfilming process which correctly and permanently copies, reproduces or forms a medium for copying or reproducing the original record on a film or other durable material and such association may thereafter dispose of the original record. Any such copy or reproduction shall be deemed to be an original record for all purposes and shall be treated as an original record in all courts or administrative agencies for the purpose of its admissibility in evidence. A facsimile, exemplification or certified copy of any such copy or reproduction reproduced from a film record shall, for all purposes, be deemed a facsimile, exemplification or certified copy of the original.
| Source | Laws 1899, c. 17, § 12, p. 91; R.S.1913, § 497; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XIX, § 13, p. 729; C.S.1922, § 8095; C.S.1929, § 8-313; R.S.1943, § 8-328; Laws 1963, c. 34, § 1, p. 195. |
8-329
Taxation; real estate.The real estate of such associations shall be subject to taxation in the same manner as provided by law in the case of other corporations and individuals.
| Source | Laws 1899, c. 17, § 14, p. 91; R.S.1913, § 498; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XIX, § 14, p. 730; C.S.1922, § 8096; C.S.1929, § 8-314; R.S.1943, § 8-329; Laws 1959, c. 22, § 1, p. 152; Laws 1971, LB 3, § 1. |
8-330
Loans; charges authorized; statement; interest rate.Every association may require borrowing members to pay all reasonable expenses incurred in connection with the making, closing, disbursing, extending, readjusting, or renewing of real estate loans. Such expenses may include abstract, recording, and registration fees, title examinations, survey, escrow services, and taxes or charges imposed upon or in connection with the making and recording of any mortgage. Such reasonable charges may be collected by the association from the borrower and shall not be considered interest or a charge for the use of the money loaned. A charge not exceeding one percent or that allowed a federally chartered association for the premature prepayment may be made. The rate of interest on any loan of money shall be determined and computed upon the assumption that the debt will be paid according to the agreed terms and in the event the loan is paid or collected by court action prior to the term of the loan, any payment charged, received, or taken as an advance or forbearance which is in the nature of and taken into account in the calculation of interest, shall be spread over the stated term of the loan for the purpose of determining the rate of interest. Any amounts paid or contracted to be paid by persons other than the borrower shall not be considered interest and shall not be taken into account in the calculation of interest. Interest may be paid on escrow accounts held for the payment of taxes, insurance, and similar payments, if agreed to in writing by the borrower and association. Loans may be made by an association under a license granted it pursuant to the Nebraska Installment Loan Act, to borrowing members whose loans are secured by real estate, to the same extent and in the same amount as such loans may lawfully be made to nonborrowing members. The association shall furnish a loan settlement statement to each borrower, indicating in detail the charges and fees such borrower has paid or obligated himself or herself to pay to the association or to any other person in connection with such loan. A copy of such statement shall be retained in the records of the association.
An association may charge and receive interest, on property improvement loans including loans made under Title I of the National Housing Act, as amended, and unsecured loans authorized in section 5(c) of the Home Owners' Loan Act, as amended.
| Source | Laws 1899, c. 17, § 14, p. 91; R.S.1913, § 499; Laws 1919, c. 190, tit. V, art. XIX, § 15, p. 730; C.S.1922, § 8097; C.S.1929, § 8-315; Laws 1933, c. 25, § 2, p. 199; C.S.Supp.,1941, § 8-315; R.S.1943, § 8-330; Laws 1961, c. 17, § 1, p. 117; Laws 1969, c. 39, § 1, p. 247; Laws 1971, LB 374, § 1; Laws 2001, LB 53, § 5. |
Cross Reference
Nebraska Installment Loan Act, see section 45-1001.
Payments contracted for as interest and premium on loan only are to be considered in determining usury. Eastern B. & L. Assn. v. Tonkinson, 76 Neb. 470, 107 N.W. 762 (1906).Foreign associations doing business in this state are subject to penalties against usury. Anselme v. American S. & L. Assn., 66 Neb. 520, 92 N.W. 745 (1902); People's B. L. & S. Assn. v. Parish, 1 Neb. Unof. 505, 96 N.W. 243 (1901).Under former act, section was only applicable to domestic associations, and foreign associations were governed by general usury statute. National Mut. B. & L. Assn. of New York v. Keeney, 57 Neb. 94, 77 N.W. 442 (1898).Interest may be reserved at highest rate permitted by law on face of loan, premiums deducted from that, and difference only paid to borrower. Livingston L. & B. Assn. v. Drummond, 49 Neb. 200